JP2012165771A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with enclosed game balls, which appropriately notifies an abnormal condition as control at an abnormal condition according to the type of a game machine or a game state, and stops the entry of a game medium into a playfield.SOLUTION: Based on the detection results of a first detection unit and second detection unit, it is determined whether a difference between the number of game balls shot into a playfield 27 and the number of game balls having passed a collecting portions (winning pockets, out hole 145, foul ball returning hole 150) reaches a threshold for abnormal condition determination or not, and the control at an abnormal condition is executed. Based on the determination that the number of floating game balls reaches a first threshold for abnormal condition determination, abnormal condition is notified as control at an abnormal condition, and based on the determination that the number of floating game balls reaches a second threshold for abnormal condition determination which exceeds the first threshold for abnormal condition determination, a game is controlled to a shooting suspension state as the control at an abnormal condition. Further the first threshold for abnormal condition determination and second threshold for abnormal condition determination are changed to different values according to the type of a Pachinko game machine 2 or game state.

Description

  In the present invention, a predetermined number of game media used in one gaming machine is enclosed in an enclosure area, the game medium is entered into the game area provided in the gaming machine, and the game medium passing through the game area is The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is collected through a collecting unit and circulated in a sealed area in order to allow the collected gaming medium to enter the gaming area again.

  Enclosed ball-type pachinko machines are known as gaming machines that can be played with points and that have points added in response to winning. In addition, as a gaming device that adds a score using a game value owned by a player and is connected so as to be communicable with a gaming machine, it adds a score using a card balance and uses a sealed ball type pachinko machine. A card unit that is communicably connected to a machine is known.

  In such enclosing ball-type gaming machines, there is one configured to detect clogging of encapsulated game media (game balls) as an error (for example, Patent Document 1). For example, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a ball detection sensor capable of detecting the presence or absence of a predetermined amount of game balls before firing is disposed at a predetermined position of a storage rod of a hitting ball launching device, When a ball is no longer detected by the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there is no ball error, and control is performed so that the game being executed is interrupted.

  Further, for example, Patent Document 2 discloses a gaming machine configured to stop the launch of a game ball when a ball jam occurs. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, when a shortage of encapsulated balls is detected by the enclosing ball shortage detection sensor provided in the supply path of game balls, a stop signal of the hitting ball launching device is output to stop the game ball from firing. By doing so, control is performed to release clogging.

JP-A-9-234271 (paragraphs 0035-0036, paragraphs 0095-0100, paragraphs 0162-0163) JP-A-9-724 (paragraph 0057, paragraph 0068)

  If the gaming machines described in Patent Literature 1 and Patent Literature 2 are combined, an abnormality such as a clogging is detected based on the presence or absence of detection of the ball detection sensor of the launching device, and the gaming ball is placed in a firing stop state. Abnormality control can be performed automatically to some extent. However, regardless of the gaming state, it will be controlled to the firing stop state at the same timing, and there is a high possibility that a game ball cannot be launched in an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player such as a big hit gaming state or a short time state. End up. Therefore, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage may be caused to the player, and the player may be dissatisfied. Further, abnormality detection is performed without taking into consideration the characteristics of the gaming machine model, and depending on the gaming machine model, it is not always possible to perform appropriate abnormal control.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, in an enclosed ball type gaming machine, abnormality notification is appropriately performed as abnormality control in accordance with the type of gaming machine and the gaming state, and entry of gaming media into the gaming area is stopped. For the purpose.

(Means 1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) used in one gaming machine are sealed in the sealed area, and are provided in the gaming machine. The game medium is caused to enter the game area, and the game medium passing through the game area is collected through the collection unit (for example, each winning port, out port 145, foul ball return port 150), and the collected game medium is again collected. A gaming machine that circulates in an enclosed area in order to enter a game area, recognizes the difference between the number of game media that enter the game area and the number of game media that pass through the collection unit, and determines that the difference is abnormal. A determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S210 and S215 in the payout control microcomputer 170. The determination unit determines whether or not a threshold value for use (for example, a threshold value for abnormality determination; see FIG. 108) has been reached. And may be executed on the game control microcomputer side mounted on the control board 16) and threshold value setting means for setting an abnormality determination threshold value (for example, steps S12, S15, S33, S36 in the payout control microcomputer 170). , S37, S406B, S406C, S34C, S34F, which may be executed on the game control microcomputer side mounted on the main control board 16, and the determination means has reached the abnormality determination threshold. An abnormal time control means (for example, a part for executing steps S211 to S213 and S216 to S217 in the payout control microcomputer 170. The main control board 16 is mounted. And may be executed on the game control microcomputer side). The abnormal-time control means executes abnormality notification as the abnormal-time control based on the determination that the difference means has reached the first abnormality determination threshold (for example, the payout control microcomputer 170). Is executed when the determination in step S210 is Y), the determination means determines that the difference has reached the second abnormality determination threshold value exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold value. Based on the control, control is made to an entry stop state (for example, a firing stop state) for stopping the entry of the game medium into the game area as an abnormal time control (for example, the payout control microcomputer 170 determines Y in step S215). (When step S216 is executed), the threshold value setting means is at least first according to at least one of the model of the gaming machine or the gaming state. The abnormality determination threshold value or the second abnormality determination threshold value is changed to a different value (for example, the payout control microcomputer 170 performs steps S12, S15, S33, S36, S37, S406B, S406C, S34C, 108, 119, 120, 122, or 125, the abnormality determination threshold value table for model A or the abnormality determination threshold value table for model B in S34F depending on whether it is model A or model B. To set a threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. Further, when Y is determined in step S35, step S36 is executed to set a big hit middle threshold value as a threshold value for abnormality determination, and when S is N in step S35, step S37 is executed as a threshold value for abnormality determination. Set the threshold for use. ). With such a configuration, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the control at the time of abnormality is automatically executed, thereby enabling early detection of the occurrence of the abnormality. In addition, since at least one of the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold is changed to a different value according to at least one of the gaming machine model or gaming state, the gaming machine model or gaming The frequency of execution of abnormal control can be adjusted according to the state, abnormal notification is appropriately given as abnormal control according to the type of gaming machine and the gaming state, and entry of game media into the game area is stopped Can be.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the gaming machine performs stop notification means (for example, steps S216A to S216C in the payout control microcomputer 170) that performs stop notification (for example, firing stop notification) when controlled to the entry stop state. For example, the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 displays a fire stop notification screen on the display 54 based on the received fire stop notification designation command. It may be executed on the side of the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vehicle has entered the entry stop state based on the stop notification, and therefore it is possible to take immediate action to release the entry stop state.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the gaming machine starts an entry stop state after the entry stop state is started by the abnormal time control means (for example, in the payout control microcomputer 170). Steps S402 and S405 are executed when the result of steps S400A and S400B is Y. (It may be executed on the side of the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16). When the stop state is released, it is determined at least which type or state of the gaming machine model or gaming state, and the abnormality determination threshold is reset based on the determination result (for example, for payout control) The microcomputer 170 determines whether it is model A or model B in steps S406B and S406C. The model A abnormal time determination threshold table for model 08 or the model B abnormal time determination threshold table is selected and a threshold value for abnormal time determination is set, and if step S406A is Y, step S406B is executed. The jackpot medium threshold may be set as the abnormality determination threshold, and when N in step S406A, step S406C may be executed to set the normal threshold as the abnormality determination threshold). . According to such a configuration, when the entry stop state is canceled, it is possible to reliably reset the abnormality determination threshold value according to the gaming machine model and the current gaming state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the gaming machine passes the number of game media entering the game area and the collecting unit when the abnormal time control is being executed by the abnormal time control means. Abnormal display execution means for executing a specific abnormal display based on the difference from the number of game media (for example, an abnormal notification start designation capable of specifying the number of floating balls in steps S211, S216B, and S216C in the payout control microcomputer 170) A part for transmitting a command and a firing stop notification designation command, for example, the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 has a received abnormality notification start designation command or launch command as shown in FIG. An abnormality notification screen including the number of floating balls specified by the stop notification designation command and a firing stop notification screen are displayed on the display 54. It may also be the main control board 16 is configured with or.) Also running in the game control microcomputer side for mounting. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp the number of differences between the number of game media that the game store clerk enters the game area and the number of game media that pass through the collection unit, based on a specific abnormality display.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a recovery process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of each bit of the operation request | requirement in the command of an operation | movement instruction | indication. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of each bit of CU state in the command of operation | movement instruction | indication. It is explanatory drawing which shows the error content shown by the CU error state in the command of operation | movement instruction | indication. It is explanatory drawing which shows the response | compatibility when the decision timing of the operation request seen from the CU side and P units are rejected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing which shows the meaning of the number of various balls contained in the response of an operation | movement response, and a fixed point. It is explanatory drawing which shows the meaning of the number of various balls contained in the response of an operation | movement response, and a fixed point. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 1 contained in the response of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 2 contained in the response of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing which shows the error content shown by the game machine error state in the response of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication cutting | disconnection request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication disconnection response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card | curd insertion request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card insertion response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card | curd return request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card return response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the mode change request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the mode change response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the communication connection of a card unit and a pachinko machine is reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the time of the standby which is not performing operation of a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a banknote is inserted in CU and it deposits. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when changing the mode of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not reach | attain a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off during the operation instruction interval during normal play, and when the same CU is connected to the P unit and power is turned off or communication is restored It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. Card when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off in the state where the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and when the same CU is connected to the P unit and power is cut off or communication is cut off It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a unit and a pachinko machine. Cards when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off in a state where the operation response is not reached during normal play, and when the same CU is connected to the P unit and power is restored or communication is cut off It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a unit and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off during the operation instruction interval during normal play, and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut off while different CUs and P units are connected It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. Card when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off in the state where the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and when the power is turned off or communication is cut off while a different CU and P unit are connected It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a unit and a pachinko machine. Card when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off while the operation response is not reached during normal play, and when the power is cut off or communication is cut off while a different CU and P unit are connected It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a unit and a pachinko machine. Card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the addition request arrives, and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut with the same CU and P units connected It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. When power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request, and when the same CU is connected to the P stand and power is cut off or communication is cut off It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of this card unit and a pachinko machine. The card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the addition request arrives, and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut off while different CU and P units are connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. When power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request, and when the power is turned off or communication is cut off while a different CU and P unit are connected It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of this card unit and a pachinko machine. The card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached, and when the same CU is connected to the P stand and the unit is restored from the power cut or communication cut off It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. In the stage before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, the CU side is disconnected from the power supply or the communication connection, and is recovered from the power supply interruption or the communication disconnection with the same CU and P stand connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of the card unit in the case, and a pachinko machine. The card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached, and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut off while different CUs and P units are connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. In the stage before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, when the power supply cut off or communication cut off occurs on the CU side, the power supply cut off or communication cut off is returned with a different CU and P stand connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of the card unit in the case, and a pachinko machine. The card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the clear request is reached, and when the same CU is connected to the P stand and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut off It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. When the power supply cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request arrives, and the same CU and P stand are connected, and the power supply or communication cut off is restored. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of the card unit in the case, and a pachinko machine. The card unit when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before the clear request is reached, and the unit is restored from power cut or communication cut off while different CU and P units are connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process with a pachinko machine. When the power supply cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request has arrived, and the power supply or communication cut off is restored with a different CU and P stand connected. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of the card unit in the case, and a pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball sharing) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball share process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which shows another example. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a payout control board. It is a flowchart which shows a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control main process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for abnormal time determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an abnormality determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value change process for abnormality determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control cancellation | release process at the time of abnormality. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control command output process of launching and lifting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value table for an abnormal time determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a signal transmission / reception process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an abnormality alerting | reporting screen and a firing stop alerting | reporting screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display screen which displays the number of enclosure balls. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control main process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination in 2nd Embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the game field of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure of the payout control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the threshold value for abnormality determination in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the threshold value change process for abnormality determination in 3rd Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts a membership card as a game recording medium and uses a game value (for example, card balance, number of possessed balls, number of stored balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card. It has a function for allowing the game to be performed by bullet firing the encapsulated ball in the machine 2. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a predetermined number (50 in this example) of game balls used in the pachinko machine 2 enclosed in an enclosure area (in this example, the pachinko machine 2). A game ball is made to enter the provided game area 27, and the game balls that have passed through the game area 27 are collected and collected via a collection unit (in this example, each winning port, out port 145, foul ball return port 150). This is a sealed ball type gaming machine in which the played game balls are circulated in the sealed area in order to enter the game area 27 again. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 encloses a game ball as an example of a game medium inside, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25 to drive the hitting ball launch motor 18 (see FIG. 2). The encapsulated balls are then shot one by one into the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 so that a game can be played.

  In addition, as long as the game balls used in the pachinko machine 2 are enclosed in the enclosing region, not only those enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 as shown in this embodiment, for example, pachinko machines The game may be performed by circulating game balls enclosed in a predetermined area extending over the machine 2 and part of the island facility. Further, as long as it is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, it is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be applied to an enclosed ball type parrot machine, for example.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown in the figure, but the start opening 1 and the start opening 2 through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 27 can be won. Are provided, and a variable display device is provided for variably displaying based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start openings, and the specific identification information in which the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is released by the combination of (for example, a combination of symbols in which the left and right sides are aligned with the same symbol) is provided. . The start port 2 is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable to the player.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that two variable display devices (variable display device (1) and variable display device (2)) capable of displaying a symbol in a variable manner are provided. Then, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display device (1) is executed based on the start winning at the start opening 1, and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display device (2) is executed based on the start winning at the start opening 2. Shall be.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. The display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of symbols in which the left middle, the right, and the right are aligned with the same odd number of symbols in the combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). 777 or the like), a probability variation jackpot state is generated, and a probability variation state (high probability state, that is, a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state is generated. To do. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening 1 and a large winning opening 2. For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port 1, the big winning port 1 is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port 2, the big winning port 2 is in the first state. It becomes. Further, the game area 27 is provided with four normal winning holes 1 to 4.

  In this embodiment, when the big winning opening, the start opening and the normal winning opening are expressed comprehensively, they are also simply referred to as winning openings.

  The game balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The game balls won in the winning opening and the game balls collected in the out opening 145 are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the game ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 3), and information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. IR light receiving unit 315 for receiving an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for performing a replay game and a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game clerk (game store clerk), converting it to an electronic signal, and outputting it. (Not shown in FIG. 1) is provided.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card and the number of possessed balls is not recorded and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 by being withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall by performing a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A lending button 321 and a return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the card unit 3. The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation for withdrawing the balance recorded in the inserted card and using it for a game by the pachinko machine 2. The return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and is an operation button for storing and discharging the number of game balls determined at the end of the game in the inserted card.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 or FIGS. 86 to 103 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, and here, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type game balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball device, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out balls that have entered the out port 145 join the winning balls that flow down the winning ball flow path 147 and flow down the merge path 702. A merge path detection switch 32 is provided in the merge path 702, and a ball flowing down the merge path 702 is detected. Accordingly, all the game balls that have entered the winning awards (large winning award, starting opening, normal winning award) and out-out 145 are detected by the merging path detection switch 32.

  On the other hand, the foul balls are discharged from the foul ball return port 150 and then detected by the foul ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul balls enter the merge path 702. The game balls that have flowed down the merge path 702 are guided to the ball collection basket 189.

  From the above, the total number of game balls detected by the merge path detection switch 32 and the game balls detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 is fired to the game area 27 and then passes through the game area 27. The total number of game balls collected in this way (the total number of game balls won in each winning slot, the number of game balls that entered the out slot 145, and the number of game balls discharged from the foul ball return slot 150).

  The game balls guided to the ball collection basket 89 are lifted by the lifting device 190. The lifting device 190 has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by the lifting motor 40, and the game ball is lifted by rotating the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the game ball by contacting the game ball being transported. While being done, the surface is polished.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharge side (upper side). The game balls to be lifted are detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The game balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driving ball outlet 149 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next game ball to the hitting ball launching position every time the player operates the hitting operation handle 25 to hit one game ball. The game balls fed by the ball feeder are detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout control board 17 as will be described later.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the circulation path of the game balls (see FIG. 4), and it is detected whether or not the number of game balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50). To do. The game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided, for example, at predetermined positions of the ball collection basket 189 shown in FIG. 2 (for example, the game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 42a at a predetermined interval in the ball collection basket 189). And the game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 42b), and the game ball excess / deficiency detection switch located on the downstream side (the side closer to the launchable area) of the ball collecting bowl 189 can no longer detect the game ball. It is determined that the number of game balls is insufficient, or the game ball over / under detection switch located on the upstream side of the ball collection basket 189 (the side close to each winning port, out port 145, or foul ball return port 150) What is necessary is just to determine with the number of game balls being excessive when a ball is detected.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, using a floating ball counter, the number of game balls fired in the game area 27 and any winning port, out port 145, and foul ball return port 150 are collected. The number of floating balls (the number of gaming balls in a state of floating in the game area 27 before being collected at the prize opening, out port 145, and foul ball return port 150 after being fired) Is counted, and the value of the floating ball counter is determined as a threshold value to perform control at the time of abnormality. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize whether the number of game balls is excessive or insufficient based on the value of the floating ball number counter, it is not necessary to provide the game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a, 42b. Conversely, for example, instead of a floating ball number counter described later, an abnormal time control described later may be performed based on the detection results of the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a, 42b.

  Next, referring to FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 2, a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the frame-shaped wooden frame 4 with its left edge as a swing center. Further, a glass door 6 is provided on a main body frame including the wooden frame 4 and the front frame (cell) 5 so as to be openable and closable around the left edge thereof.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7 a and 7 b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6 a and 6 b of the wooden frame 4. When the open front frame 5 is pressed against the wooden frame 4, the engaging protrusions 6a, 6b get over the engaging receiving pieces 7a, 7b, and the engaging protrusions 6a, 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 5. When the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b against the biasing force of the spring. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are pulled up. Is released and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 13 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 5 in the upper part of the wooden frame 4, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the wooden frame 4 and is locked. Further, a glass door closing detector 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in an upper portion of the front frame 5, and this glass door is that the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 to be in a locked state. Detected by the closure detector 12.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a gaming machine communication unit 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The gaming machine communication unit 325 and the payout control board 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the control unit 323. At the same time, data to be written to the inserted card is sent from the control unit 323 to the card reader / writer 327. When transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  Display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the control unit 323 to the display 312, and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control board 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control unit 34, a launch unit 39, and an effect unit 50. Is provided.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  In addition, the above-described joining path detection switch 32, foul ball detection switch 33, glass door opening solenoid 10, front frame opening solenoid 11, glass door closing detector 12, and front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the dispensing control board 17. Are provided in a connected state.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control board 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a game ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start opening winning information is information indicating that a game ball has won either the starting opening 1 or the starting opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol fixed number of times is information on a symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device for winning at the start port 1 or the start port 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine maker, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes a probability change information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out-ball detection signal is input from the merge path detection switch 32 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated.

  When the dispensing control board 17 performs excitation control of the glass door opening solenoid 10, the glass door 6 is unlocked and can be opened as described with reference to FIG. When the dispensing control board 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 5 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 3, the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 and closed to output a glass door closing detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 and input to the dispensing control board 17. As described with reference to FIG. 3, by pressing the front frame 5 against the machine frame 4 and closing it, a front frame closing detection signal is output from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the payout control board 17.

  The gaming machine communication unit 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected. From the gaming machine communication part 325 to the payout control board 17, as described later, an addition request and a subtraction request Various commands such as a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the game balls are lent out or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control board 17 adds the number of game balls in response thereto. Update. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the divided transfer of balls (ball sharing process) or the wagon service is performed. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting that the game is permitted to the payout control board 17 or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the game ball number by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be subtracted from the game ball number by the above-described subtraction request command.

  Various responses of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, the jackpot information, and error information are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the gaming machine communication unit 325. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control board 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detecting signal, and foul ball detecting signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played. The number of balls to be added is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. It is. The number of subtracted balls is the number of subtracted balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on a firing detection signal transmitted from a game ball control unit 34 described later to the payout control board 17. Each response of the start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the firing motor 18. The single shot switch 36 is used for the player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving the game balls one by one into the game area 27. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs a detection signal thereof. Each time the firing motor 18 makes one revolution, the origin is detected and a signal is output.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. In addition, a launch detection signal indicating that a game ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control board 17. Upon receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control board 17 updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of in-game balls by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. As a result, the game ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  As described with reference to FIG. 2, the lifting unit 39 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a lifting motor 40, a ball raising switch (upper) 41a, and a ball raising switch (lower) 41b. ing. Further, the transport unit 39 is provided with a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). The gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switches 1 and 2 are switches for detecting whether or not the total number (for example, 50) of gaming balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2 is excessive or insufficient.

  A lifting motor excitation output signal for exciting the lifting motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control board 17 to the lifting unit 39. On the other hand, a signal for detection of lifting (passing / full tank) based on the detection signals of the lifting switch (upper) 41a and the lifting switch (lower) 41b is transmitted from the lifting unit 39 to the payout control board 17. , 50 replenishment detection signals are input as detection signals of the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a) and gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b).

  The effect unit 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. I do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the display effect control board 53. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state by the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of occurrences of jackpots or the number of probability changes, and the card unit operation command is a command when the player operates the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50.

  As a command from the payout control board 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. The display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received even though a certain time period exceeding 300 ms has elapsed after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even after 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and when the error count is continuously counted 10 times, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and performs control to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation on the display unit 54.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, main data of various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and a transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a side effect that is used only for Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 5 shows RAM storage data provided in the control unit 323 on the CU side and RAM storage data mounted on the P-side payout control board 17. First, when the power supply is started up with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control board 17 on the P unit side The main control board 16 transmits a main chip ID (an ID for identifying a game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16), and transmits the main chip ID to the CU side. The payout chip ID (ID for identifying the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 17) stored in the payout control board 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction or response is transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and the P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 64 to 81 described later, when communication is interrupted during communication, the SQN is backed up and stored until the communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the time of occurrence (see FIGS. 57 and 64 to 81), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received according to the occurrence time of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 57 and 64 to 81). The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, a certain operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the next time the operation instruction is sent, the sequence number is incremented by +1. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a game ball that has been struck into the game area 27 wins and additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the added ball counter is used to calculate the added ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a game ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fire ball detection switch, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the start port 1 or the start port 2 and a start port 1 winning signal or a start port 2 winning signal is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 The starting number 1 winning counter or the starting position 2 winning number counter counts the number of winnings and transmits the count value from the P platform side to the CU side. Further, the payout control board 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time by the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and the count value of the game ball counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, every time the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter, starting port 2 winning counter, and gaming ball counter are transmitted to the CU side, the count values are set to the previous ball count. After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the related information storage area, the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information are cleared to zero. . In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port 1 total winning number (the total number of starting port 1 times), The starting port 2 total winning number (cumulative number of starting port 2 times) and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P side. Further, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the start port 1 total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and based on the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side. Update the total number of winnings at the starting port 2. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU manages the latest information by updating the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting opening 1 and the total number of winning prizes with the current ball-related information sent from the P unit one by one. It becomes possible to do.

  The breakdown of the “number of added balls” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information described later. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU compares the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (provided that a match (confirmation of confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit2 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error is notified by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management An error notification by the computer 1 may be performed), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by the staff may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. It can be done (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU side. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (a stored ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of an accepted (inserted) card. The control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU holds in response to an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (replay button) 319 (see FIG. 4) provided on the CU)). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the control unit 323 (see FIG. 4) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) and use it for the game, An addition request ball number for adding the ball number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation to perform a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for drinks, etc., is executed, the number of balls required for subtraction of the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 6 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline. First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units. Further, a recovery response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU.

  Also, a notification start request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This notification start request command requests the P units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time). In addition, a communication start response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This response to the communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  In addition, an operation instruction command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The operation instruction command is for instructing various types (game operations) to the P units and requesting transmission of game table information (addition / subtraction data, etc.) such as game balls. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of the game machine. In addition, a response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the execution result of the game operation instruction and game table information such as game balls (addition / subtraction data and the like) to the CU.

  In addition, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The communication disconnection request command requests the P units to disconnect the communication connection. Further, a communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response to the communication disconnection response notifies the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  In addition, a card insertion request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The command for requesting card insertion is to notify the P cards of card insertion (insertion of visitor card or membership card). Also, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this card insertion response is a response to card insertion to the CU.

  Also, a card return request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The command for requesting card return notifies the P units of card return (return of visitor card or membership card). A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU.

  Also, a mode change request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The mode change request command requests the P units to change the mode (change to an operation mode, trial mode, maintenance mode, or test mode, which will be described later). In addition, a response of the mode change response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the mode change response is a response to the mode change result to the CU.

  Next, the contents of the command / response shown in FIG. 6 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, referring to FIG. 7, the recovery request command transmitted from the CU to the P units requests the P units to transmit recovery information. As shown in FIG. 7, the recovery request command is a command having a command length of 18 bytes including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). is there. As shown in FIG. 7, the command code of the recovery request command is 0x03. Further, since the recovery request command only requests transmission of recovery information, it does not include specific data and the command size is 0 byte.

  In FIG. 7, the format column shows the data format of the data in the command / response, BIN shows binary data, BCD shows decimal data, and HEX shows hexadecimal data. In this embodiment, each command and each response is encrypted and transmitted / received. However, the encryption column indicates data to be encrypted in the command / response, and a circle indicates that the data is to be encrypted. It shows that there is. This also applies to the commands and responses shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in FIGS. 7 to 32, the command and the response name are simply the command name, the command and response size are the command length, and the communication direction is the command direction without particularly distinguishing the command and the response. And so on.

  The response of the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is for transmitting the recovery information held by the P platform to the CU. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the response of the recovery response includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, information on each specific data, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). The command has a command length of 68 bytes. As shown in FIG. 8, the command code of the response of the recovery response is 0x13, and the command size of specific data is 50 bytes.

  As specific data of this recovery response, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, a 6-byte connection time, a 1-byte final sequence number, and an 8-byte C-ID (visitor card or membership card ID) And previous ball related information and current ball related information.

  The connection time is the connection time that was backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units, and is the sequence number that P units last transmitted to the CU. Further, the C-ID is a C-ID that was backed up by P units.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, the previous ball related information includes 2-byte game ball acquisition number information, 1-byte back ball addition information, 1-byte game ball firing number information, and 1-byte out ball. Passing information, 1-byte symbol determination count 1 information, 1-byte symbol determination count 2 information, 1-byte startup port 1 information, 1-byte startup port 2 information, and 1-byte startup port 3 information 1-byte winning opening 1 information, 1-byte winning opening 2 information, 1-byte winning opening 1 information, 1-byte winning opening 2 information, 1-byte winning opening 3 information, 1-byte And the winning opening 4 information.

  The game ball acquisition number information is game ball acquisition number information (number of game balls acquired by winning) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. The back ball addition information is back ball addition information (the number of added foul balls) notified by a response transmitted to the CU last time. The game ball firing number information is game ball firing number information (number of game balls fired) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Further, the out ball passing information is out ball passing information (game ball that has passed through the out port 145) notified by a response transmitted to the CU last time.

  The symbol determination number 1 information is the symbol determination number 1 (the number of times that the symbol display is performed by the variable display device (1)) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. The symbol determination number 2 information is the symbol determination number 2 (the number of times the symbol is fixedly displayed by the variable display device (2)) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Note that in a gaming machine provided with only one variable display device, for example, only the symbol determination count 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the symbol determination count 2 information.

  Further, the start port 1 information is the number of start ports 1 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times the start port 1 has been won). Further, the start port 2 information is the number of start ports 2 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times the start port 2 has been won). The start port 3 information is the number of start ports 3 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times the start port 3 is won). In this embodiment, since only two start ports, the start port 1 and the start port 2, are provided, only the start port 1 information and the start port 2 information are used, and the start port 3 information is always 0. Data is stored. Note that when the gaming machine is configured to include three start ports, all of the start port 1 information to the start port 3 information may be used. In addition, in a gaming machine provided with only one start port, for example, only the start port 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the start port 1 information and the start port 2 information.

  Further, the special winning opening 1 information is the number of times of the special winning opening notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times of winning the large winning opening 1). Further, the special winning opening 2 information is the number of the special winning opening 2 notified (the number of winning in the special winning opening 2) notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time. Note that in a gaming machine provided with only one winning prize opening, for example, only the winning prize opening 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the winning prize opening 2 information.

  The winning opening 1 information is the number of winning openings 1 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times winning in the normal winning opening 1). The winning opening 2 information is the number of winning openings 2 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times winning in the normal winning opening 2). The winning opening 3 information is the number of times the winning opening 3 is notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times the normal winning opening 3 is won). The winning opening 4 information is the number of winning openings 4 notified by the response transmitted to the CU last time (the number of times winning in the normal winning opening 4). Although this embodiment shows a case where four normal winning holes are provided, a gaming machine in which only one to three normal winning holes are provided or a game in which no normal winning holes are provided. In the machine, it is sufficient to always store 0 data with respect to the winning prize openings 1 to 4 which become unnecessary according to the number of normal winning openings.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the current ball related information includes 3 bytes of game ball total number information, 2 bytes of game ball acquisition number information, 1 byte of back ball addition information, and 1 byte of game balls. Number-of-fired information, 1-byte out ball passing information, 1-byte symbol determination count 1 information, 1-byte symbol determination count 2 information, 1-byte startup port 1 information, and 1-byte startup port 2 information 1-byte start opening 3 information, 1-byte large winning opening 1 information, 1-byte large winning opening 2 information, 1-byte winning opening 1 information, 1-byte winning opening 2 information, 1-byte Byte winning opening 3 information and 1 byte winning opening 4 information are included.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls currently held by P units. The game ball acquisition number information is game ball acquisition number information (the number of game balls acquired by the game) currently held by P units. Further, the back ball addition information is back ball addition information (the number of added foul balls) currently held by the P units. The game ball firing number information is information on the number of game balls fired (number of game balls fired) currently held by P units. Further, the out ball passing information is out ball passing information currently held by P cars (game balls that have passed through the out port 145).

  Further, the symbol determination number 1 information is the symbol determination number 1 currently held by the P units (the number of times the symbol is fixedly displayed by the variable display device (1)). The symbol determination number 2 information is the symbol determination number 2 currently held by the P units (the number of times the symbol is fixedly displayed by the variable display device (2)). Note that in a gaming machine provided with only one variable display device, for example, only the symbol determination count 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the symbol determination count 2 information.

  Further, the start port 1 information is the number of start ports that are currently held in the P platform (the number of times the start port 1 has been won). The start port 2 information is the number of start ports 2 currently held by the P platform (the number of times the start port 2 has been won). The start port 3 information is the number of start ports 3 currently held by the P platform (the number of times the start port (3) has been won). In this embodiment, since only two start ports, the start port 1 and the start port 2, are provided, only the start port 1 information and the start port 2 information are used, and the start port 3 information is always 0. Data is stored. Note that when the gaming machine is configured to include three start ports, all of the start port 1 information to the start port 3 information may be used. In addition, in a gaming machine provided with only one start port, for example, only the start port 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the start port 1 information and the start port 2 information.

  Further, the winning prize 1 information is the number of times of winning 1 that is currently held in the P platform (the number of times winning in the winning prize 1). Further, the special winning opening 2 information is the number of large winning openings 2 currently held in the P platform (the number of times that the big winning opening 2 has been won). Note that in a gaming machine provided with only one winning prize opening, for example, only the winning prize opening 1 information may be used, and 0 data may be always stored in the winning prize opening 2 information.

  Further, the winning opening 1 information is the number of times the winning opening 1 is currently held in the P platform (the number of times the normal winning opening 1 has been won). The winning opening 2 information is the number of times the winning opening 2 is currently held in the P platform (the number of times the normal winning opening 2 has been won). The winning opening 3 information is the number of times the winning opening 3 is currently held on the P platform (the number of times the winning is in the normal winning opening 3). The winning opening 4 information is the number of winning openings 4 times currently held in the P platform (the number of times winning in the normal winning opening 4). Although this embodiment shows a case where four normal winning holes are provided, a gaming machine in which only one to three normal winning holes are provided or a game in which no normal winning holes are provided. In the machine, it is sufficient to always store 0 data with respect to the winning prize openings 1 to 4 which become unnecessary according to the number of normal winning openings.

  The specific data shown above (connection time, final sequence number, C-ID, previous ball related information data, current ball related information data) are data to be backed up on P units. is there. However, all values are set to 0 when shipped from the factory or when backup data is indefinite.

  Here, the recovery process performed by the CU will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recovery process performed by the CU. When communication with the P units is resumed (reconnected), the CU acquires the P chip IDs (main chip ID, payout chip ID) by the chip ID authentication sequence as will be described later, and the recovery response The communication start time (connection time during the recovery response) is acquired. Then, the CU uses the acquired chip ID and communication start time to determine whether or not the P units are the same as the other party connected last time. In this case, the CU determines whether or not the acquired chip ID matches the chip ID backed up by the CU itself in the chip ID authentication sequence. Further, the CU receives the response of the recovery response and determines whether or not the acquired communication start time matches the communication start time backed up by the CU itself. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the chip IDs match and the communication start times match, the CU determines that the same P units as the previous time are connected. In addition, if at least either the chip ID or the communication start time does not match, the CU determines that P units different from the previous time are connected.

  Next, the CU executes a recovery process for the number of game balls using the result of the match determination of the communication partner shown in FIG. 10A and the sequence number in the recovery response. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10B, the CU is determined to have the same communication partner, and the SQN (the final sequence number in the recovery response) recognized on the P base is backed up by the CU itself. If the SQN is 1 ahead, add the previous number of balls that P units backed up and the current number of balls that P units backed up to the number of game balls backed up by the CU. Subtract the previous subtracted ball number and the current subtracted ball number to obtain the corrected number of game balls. Further, the CU is determined to have the same communication partner, but unless the SQN recognized on the P platform side is one more advanced than the SQN backed up by the CU itself, the CU backs up. The current number of added balls backed up by P units is added to the number of game balls that are backed up, and the current number of subtracted balls backed up by P units is subtracted to obtain the corrected number of game balls. Further, when it is determined that the communication counterparts do not match, the CU uses the number of game balls backed up by the CU as the corrected number of game balls as it is.

  The added ball number is information obtained by adding back ball added information to the game ball acquired number information in the recovery response. Further, the number of subtraction balls is information on the number of game balls fired during the recovery response.

  If the CU has not received the data transmitted by the P units when the previous communication is disconnected, the sequence number held by the P units is advanced by one. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10B, the CU recovers the number of game balls using data that could not be received (the previous number of added balls and the previous number of subtracted balls).

  Further, when the communication partners do not match, the CU does not automatically correct the game balls. In addition, since the P units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the game store clerk shall manually correct the number of game balls on the card using a POS terminal or the like. .

  Next, the CU uses the result of matching determination of the communication partner shown in FIG. 10A and the sequence number in the recovery response to use the out ball passing information, the symbol determination frequency 1 information, the symbol determination frequency 2 information, Recovery processing of start port 1 information, start port 2 information, start port 3 information, grand prize port 1 information, grand prize port 2 information, winning port 1 information, winning port 2 information, winning port 3 information and winning port 4 information Run each one. In addition, hereinafter, the out ball passing information, the symbol determination number 1 information, the symbol determination number 2 information, the starting port 1 information, the starting port 2 information, the starting port 3 information, the big winning port 1 information, the big winning port 2 information, the winning a prize The mouth 1 information, the winning mouth 2 information, the winning mouth 3 information and the winning mouth 4 information are also collectively referred to as game history balls.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the CU is determined to have the same communication partner, and the SQN (the last sequence number in the recovery response) recognized on the P base is backed up by the CU itself. When the game progresses 1 more than SQN, the number of game history balls that the CU is backing up is the previous game history ball number and the current game history ball number that is being backed up by the P units (each game history ball that is being recovered). Number) is added to obtain the corrected number of game history balls. Further, the CU is determined to have the same communication partner, but unless the SQN recognized on the P platform side is one more advanced than the SQN backed up by the CU itself, the CU backs up. The number of game history balls that are currently backed up by P cars (the number of game history balls that are being recovered) is added to the number of game history balls that have been corrected to obtain the corrected number of game history balls. In addition, when it is determined that the communication partners do not match, the CU uses the game history ball number backed up by the CU as the corrected game history ball number as it is.

  The communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 11 requests the P unit to correct the game ball and sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time). As shown in FIG. 11, the communication start request command includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 6-byte connection time, a 1-byte data correction request, a 1-byte sequence number, This is a command with a command length of 29 bytes including data of 3 bytes of game balls and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 11, the command code of the communication start request command is 0x05, and the command size of specific data is 11 bytes.

  Specific data of the communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request to clear 0 backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is made to the P units.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, there is no game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it is designated that there is a game ball correction request.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, the request is not present, and when the bit is “1”, the request is present. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. Further, in this embodiment, “clear request” is also expressed as “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” as “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” as “game ball correction”.

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game ball data is the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU performs backup of the connection time and backup of the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The P machines perform the following process when receiving this communication start request.
When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

Back up the connection time.
In addition, each process performed with the said P units is performed in an order from the top.

  The response of the communication start response transmitted from the P platform to the CU shown in FIG. 12 notifies the CU that the data correction and the backup of the communication ID (communication start time) have been completed. As shown in FIG. 12, the response of the communication start response is a command having a command length of 18 bytes including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 12, the command code of the response of the communication start response is 0x15. Further, since the response of the communication start response only notifies the end of the backup, it does not include specific data and the command size is 0 byte.

  The operation instruction commands transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 13 are “addition of game balls”, “subtraction of game balls”, “game permission / prohibition”, “game balls and sequence numbers”. "Clear" operation is instructed, and transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units. As shown in FIG. 13, the operation instruction command includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte operation request, a 2-byte CU state, and a 3-byte addition / subtraction request ball count. A command with a command length of 28 bytes including a 2-byte card balance, a 1-byte CU error status, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 13, the command code of the operation instruction command is 0x06, and the command size of specific data is 10 bytes. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the specific data of the operation instruction command includes an operation request, a CU state, an addition / subtraction request ball number, a card balance, and a CU error state.

  As an operation request in the operation instruction command, 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed, and when the bit is "0", the request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request.

  In this embodiment, the “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, the “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, and the “game prohibition request” is simply referred to as “prohibition request”. In other words, “clear request for number of game balls and sequence number” is also simply referred to as “clear request”, and “glass door open request” is also simply referred to as “glass open request”.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit6 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  As the CU state in the operation instruction command, 10-bit data of Bit0 to Bit9 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. When Bit 0 is “1”, an indication of card insertion processing is instructed. When Bit1 is “1”, an indication of card return processing is instructed. When Bit 2 is “1”, an instruction to display the deposit process is instructed. When Bit3 is “1”, an instruction to display addition (card insertion) is instructed. When Bit 4 is “1”, an instruction to display addition (prepaid lending) is instructed. When Bit 5 is “1”, an instruction to display addition (replay) is instructed. When Bit 6 is “1”, subtraction display is being instructed (dividing the ball). When Bit 7 is “1”, subtraction display (wagon service) is instructed. When Bit 8 is “1”, the clear display is instructed. When Bit 9 is “1”, a break display is instructed.

  The addition / subtraction request ball number is a value to be added to or subtracted from the game ball. Specifically, when Bit 0 in the operation request is “1”, the addition / subtraction request ball number indicates a value to be added to the game ball. In addition, when Bit1 during the operation request is “1”, the number of balls requested for addition / subtraction indicates a value to be subtracted from the game balls.

  The card balance is the balance of the card inserted in the CU.

  The CU error status is an error code of an error that is occurring in the CU. When no error has occurred in the CU, the values of each bit in the CU error state are all zero.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing details of each bit of the operation request in the operation instruction command. As shown in FIG. 14, the Bit0 game ball number addition request is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU at the timing of prepaid consumption or stored ball replay. Then, when the P unit receives the operation instruction command designating the game ball number addition request, the number of addition balls (the number of addition / subtraction request balls in the operation instruction command) is added to the number of game balls held by the P unit. Value). Also, the Bit1 game ball subtraction request is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU at a timing common to the wagon service and game balls. Then, upon receiving the operation instruction command designating the game ball subtraction request, the P units receive the subtraction request ball number (the number of addition / subtraction request balls in the operation instruction command) from the number of game balls held by the P unit. Subtract).

  Also, the Bit2 game permission request is set to “1” at the timing of switching from game prohibition to game permission and transmitted from the CU. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction command that designates a game permission request, the P devices permit the P games. The Bit3 game prohibition request is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU at the timing of switching from game permission to game prohibition. Then, when receiving the operation instruction command designating the game prohibition request, the P players prohibit the P games.

  In addition, the clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number of Bit4 is set to “1” at the timing of card return and transmitted from the CU. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction command designating a clear request for the number of game balls and the sequence number, the P balls clear the game balls and sequence numbers held by the P balls to zero.

  Further, the glass door opening request of Bit 5 is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU when the glass door is opened. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction command specifying a glass door opening request, the P platform opens the P glass doors. The cell open request for Bit 6 is set to “1” and transmitted from the CU when the cell (front frame) is released. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction command designating a cell opening request, the P devices open the P cells.

  The P units comprehensively determine the “game permission / game prohibition” set by the operation instruction command from the CU, the remaining number of game balls held by the P unit, and the error state of the P units. Then, it is determined whether or not a game ball can be launched. In addition, the timing when the P cars change the setting value of “game permission / game prohibition” is as follows. That is, when an operation instruction command specifying a game permission request is received from the CU, the P machines set the game permission. In addition, when an operation instruction command designating a game prohibition request is received from the CU, when communication disconnection is detected, or when the P units are powered on, the P units are set to game prohibition.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing details of each bit of the CU state in the operation instruction command. As shown in FIG. 15, if the display of Bit 0 during card insertion processing is set to “1”, it is in a state from when a card is inserted into the CU until the balance is finalized (inquiry to the host device). It shows that there is. Further, if the display of Bit 1 during the card return process is set to “1”, this indicates that the card is in a state from when the card return button is pressed until the card is returned. Further, if the display of Bit2 during the depositing process is set to “1”, it indicates that the state is from when cash is deposited to the CU until it is confirmed.

  In addition, if Bit3 addition display (card insertion) is set to “1”, it indicates that the game ball addition (card insertion) is being expressed after the card is inserted into the CU. . Further, when Bit 4 addition display (prepaid lending) is set to “1”, it indicates that a game ball addition (prepaid lending) is expressed by CU. Further, when Bit 5 addition display (replay) is set to “1”, it indicates that the CU is expressing the game ball addition (replay payout). In addition, when Bit 6 subtraction display (mob ball division) is set to “1”, it indicates that the game ball subtraction (mob ball division) is expressed by the CU. In addition, when Bit 7 subtraction display (wagon service) is set to “1”, it indicates that a game ball subtraction (wagon service) is expressed by the CU.

  If the clear display of Bit 8 is set to “1”, it indicates that the clear is expressed by the CU after a game ball and sequence number clear request. In addition, when the break display of Bit 9 is set to “1”, this indicates that the CU is expressing a break.

  Note that the CU status information in the operation instruction command is provided for display control on the P platform side, and the P platform is shown in FIG. 15 based on the CU status information. Control for displaying the contents may or may not be performed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing error contents shown in the CU error state in the operation instruction command. As shown in FIG. 16, when the code 0xC0 is set in the CU error state in the operation instruction command, it indicates that the CU has detected a ball holding abnormality. Further, when the code 0xC1 is set, it indicates that the base abnormality is detected by the CU. Further, when the code 0xC2 is set, it indicates that an illegal winning is detected by the CU.

  Here, the sequence number designated in the operation instruction command will be described. In this embodiment, the sequence number takes a value in the data range of 0 to 255, and when it is counted up to the maximum value of 255, it next returns to the value 0. The CU counts up the sequence number by one each time an operation instruction command is transmitted (however, when the same command is retransmitted, the CU does not count up). Further, the CU backs up the sequence number and the request contents of the operation request when transmitting the operation instruction command specifying the operation request.

  Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the P units back up the value obtained by incrementing the sequence number in the received operation instruction command by 1 and transmit an operation response response including the incremented sequence number to the CU. Further, when the sequence number in the received operation instruction command is delayed by one from the sequence number being backed up, the P units determine that the operation instruction command is to be retransmitted.

  When the retransmitted operation instruction command is received, the P devices perform the following processing. First, in order to prevent double execution of addition and subtraction, the P machines do not refer to the bits of “Bit 0: game ball addition request” or “Bit 1: game ball subtraction request” in the operation request. In addition, the P platform transmits an operation response response to the CU. In this case, the P platform sets and transmits the following values as ball related information. As the number of game balls, the latest number of game balls is set and transmitted. As the number of additional balls, a value obtained by adding the current number of additional balls to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted. As the number of subtraction balls, a value obtained by adding the current number of subtraction balls to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted. As the start port one-time information, a value obtained by adding the current one start port number to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted. As the start port 2 times information, a value obtained by adding the current start port 2 times to the previously transmitted value is set and transmitted.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation request confirmation timing as seen from the CU side and the correspondence when the request is rejected by the P units. As shown in FIG. 17, the game ball addition request is determined at the timing at which the operation instruction command is transmitted. Then, when rejected by the P platform, the CU disconnects communication (specifically, transmits a communication disconnection request command). Further, the game ball subtraction request is determined at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P units. And when it is rejected by P units, CU cancels a subtraction request. Further, the clear request is decided at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P units. And when it is refused by P units, CU cancels a clear request.

  Further, the game permission request is confirmed at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P cars. When the P machine is rejected, the CU transmits an operation instruction command for designating a game permission request until the P machine is permitted. Further, the game prohibition request is determined at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P cars. If the P machine is rejected, the CU transmits an operation instruction command for designating a game prohibition request until the P machine is prohibited.

  Further, the glass opening request is determined at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P platform. And when it is refused by P platform, CU cancels a glass opening request. Further, the cell opening request is determined at the timing when the response of the operation response is received without being rejected by the P units. And when it is refused by P units, CU cancels a cell open request.

  The response of the operation response transmitted to the CU from the P table shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 notifies the CU of game table information such as the execution result of the instruction operation and the number of game balls. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the response of the operation response includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, information on each specific data, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). This is a command having a command length of 41 bytes. As shown in FIG. 18, the command code of the response of the operation response is 0x16, and the specific data command size is 24 bytes.

  Specific data of the operation response includes a 1-byte sequence number, a 1-byte execution result, current ball related information, and game machine information, as shown in FIGS.

  The sequence number is a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction command.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated.

  As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown. For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear are not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  In this embodiment, “game ball number addition refusal” is simply referred to as “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is also simply referred to as “subtraction refusal”, and “game permission refusal” is simply referred to as “permission refusal”. "Game ban refusal" is simply referred to as "prohibition refusal", "Game ball number and sequence number clear refusal" is also simply referred to as "clear refusal", and "glass door open refusal" is simply "glass open refusal" "

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the ball related information includes 3 bytes of game ball total number information, 2 bytes of game ball acquisition number information, 1 byte of back ball addition information, and 1 byte of ball information. Number of game balls launched, 1-byte out ball passing information, 1-byte symbol fixed number of times 1 information, 1-byte symbol fixed number of times 2 information, 1-byte start port 1 information, and 1-byte start port 2 information, 1 byte start opening 3 information, 1 byte big winning opening 1 information, 1 byte big winning opening 2 information, 1 byte winning opening 1 information, 1 byte winning opening 2 information, 1-byte winning opening 3 information and 1-byte winning opening 4 information are included.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at one transmission.

  “Back ball addition information” is the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by the launching unit 34 (see FIG. 4), and when there are multiple back balls at one transmission, the total number Information. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by the launching unit 34 (see FIG. 4), and is information on the total number when there are multiple balls fired during one transmission. The “out ball passing information” is the number of game balls (out balls) that have passed through the out port 145, and is information of the total number when there are a plurality of out balls at one transmission.

  The “symbol determination number 1 information” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 1 and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number 2 information” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  “Starting port 1 information” is winning information (the number of winnings) of the starting port 1, and “1” is added when winning at the starting port 1. “Starting port 2 information” is winning information (number of winnings) of the starting port 2, and “1” is added when winning at the starting port 2. “Starting port 3 information” is winning information (number of winnings) of the starting port 3, and “1” is added when winning at the starting port 3. However, in this embodiment, since only two start ports, the start port 1 and the start port 2, are provided, 0 value is always set in the start port 3 information.

  “Large winning mouth 1 information” is winning information (number of winnings) of the big winning mouth 1, and “1” is added when winning the big winning mouth 1. “Big winning opening 2 information” is winning information (number of winnings) of the big winning opening 2, and “1” is added when winning the big winning opening 2.

  The “winning mouth 1 information” is the winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning mouth 1, and “1” is added when winning the normal winning mouth 1. “Winning slot 2 information” is winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning slot 2, and “1” is added when winning the normal winning slot 2. The “winning mouth 3 information” is the winning information (number of winnings) of the normal winning mouth 3, and “1” is added when winning the normal winning mouth 3. The “winning opening 4 information” is winning information (the number of winnings) of the normal winning opening 4, and “1” is added when winning the normal winning opening 4.

  The game table information is for notifying the CU of the status of the game table (P), and specifically, as shown in FIG. A gaming table state 2 and a one-byte gaming table error state are included.

  The gaming machine state 1 is data composed of bits of Bit0 to Bit5. When Bit 0 is “0”, the game permission state is designated, and when Bit 0 is “1”, the game prohibition state is designated. When Bit 1 is “0”, standby is designated, and when “1”, gaming is designated.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the number of game balls is designated as 0, when Bit 3 is “1”, completion of the game is designated, and when Bit 4 is “1”, it is designated that the gaming table is reset. When Bit 5 is “1”, it is designated that there is game machine history information.

  The game table state 2 is composed of bit data of Bit0 to Bit7. When Bit0 is “1”, the jackpot is 1; when Bit1 is “1”, the jackpot is 2; when Bit2 is “1”, the jackpot is 3; When Bit 3 is “1”, it is designated that the jackpot 4 is being displayed, and when Bit 4 is “1”, the jackpot end display is being displayed. When Bit 5 is “1”, the high base is designated, when Bit 6 is “1”, the probability is high, and when Bit 7 is “1”, “waiting for customer” is designated.

  In the gaming machine error state, an error code of an error occurring in the gaming machine is designated.

  FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 are explanatory diagrams showing the meaning of various balls included in the response of the operation response and the confirmation points. The meanings of the various balls and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, but a supplementary explanation is given below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. The CU corrects the number of game balls held by the CU using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information” and “game ball firing number information” described below, and then P games It is checked whether the number of balls matches the number of game balls of the CU itself. When the number of game balls does not match, the CU transmits a command for designating game stop to the P units.

  The game ball acquisition number information is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls by the “prize ball” (however, the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU is not included). The CU adds this data to the number of game balls held by the CU itself. Note that the CU does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  The back ball addition information is the number of balls added to the number of game balls by the “back ball” (foul ball) at the time of launch (however, the “addition request ball number” transmitted from the CU is not included). ). The CU adds this data to the number of game balls held by the CU itself. Note that the CU does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  The game ball firing number information is the number of balls subtracted from the game ball by ball launch (however, the “subtraction request ball number” transmitted from the CU is not included). The CU subtracts this data from the number of game balls held by the CU itself. Note that the CU does not subtract the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card. In addition, the CU does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by the CU itself is 0 balls.

  Out ball passing information is information of a ball that has been confirmed to be fired (the passing of a game ball in the out port 145). The CU uses this data to check the operation of the game machine.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for the winning of game balls to the start port 1 and the start port 2, respectively. The CU is used to count the start number of the game stand (P units). Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 times, the number of start ports 2 times and the number of start ports 3 are respectively P start ports 1, start ports 2 and start ports 3 (however, in this embodiment, the gaming machine includes start port 1 and start port This is the number of times that a game ball has won a prize (provided only with two start ports 2), and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The grand prize opening 1 and the big prize opening 2 are the number of times (number) that the game balls have been awarded to the P big prize opening 1 and the big prize opening 2, and the CU is the operating state of the game machine (P machine). Use this data for checking.

  The winning opening 1 to the winning opening 4 are the number of times (number) of game balls won in the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the gaming stand.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing details of each bit of the gaming machine state 1 included in the response of the operation response.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (fires a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. Specifically, if Bit 1 is “0”, it indicates that it is waiting, and if Bit 1 is “1”, it indicates that it is in the game.

  The number of game balls 0 in Bit 2 is data indicating whether or not the remaining number of game balls is zero.

  The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the ball is stopped on the P platform, and then all the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the shot balls are confirmed It is. Specifically, if Bit 3 is “0”, it indicates that the game is not completed (the state of all balls is indeterminate), and if Bit 3 is “1”, the game is completed (where all balls are missing). Note that if the player P has not confirmed the completion of the game for more than 15 seconds after stopping the ball firing, it will time out and the game will be completed. .

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated.

  The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 indicates whether or not P table holds game table history information such as “start count” and “hit count”. Specifically, if Bit 5 is “0”, it indicates that the gaming machine history information is not held, and if Bit 5 is “1”, it indicates that the gaming machine history information is held. Note that this P data is turned off when the game machine history information is cleared by clearing the RAM. The P units turn this data on at the timing when data such as “start count” and “big hit count” is added after the RAM is cleared. Since the CU matches the game machine history information with the P machines, the CU also clears the game machine history information held by the CU itself when detecting the turn-off of this data.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing details of each bit of the gaming machine state 2 included in the response of the operation response.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base). The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base.

  During the big hit end display of Bit4, “1” is set at the end of the big hit. During the high base of Bit5, “1” is set in the high base. During the high probability of Bit 6, “1” is set during the high probability. While waiting for a customer of Bit 7, “1” is set while waiting for the customer.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the error contents shown in the gaming machine error state during the response of the operation response. As shown in FIG. 24, when the code 0x81 is set in the gaming machine error state during the response of the operation response, it indicates that an illegal winning error is detected on the main control board. When the code 0x82 is set, it indicates that a radio wave sensor error is detected by the main control board. Further, when the code 0x83 is set, it indicates that a magnet sensor error is detected on the main control board.

  Further, when the code 0x41 is set, it indicates that the power-off of the card unit is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x42 is set, it indicates that the power-off 1 of the main control board is detected by the payout control board. When the code 0x43 is set, it indicates that the power-off 2 of the main control board is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x44 is set, it indicates that the disconnection control board has detected the disconnection of the communication line with the CU. Further, when the code 0x45 is set, it indicates that the disconnection control board detects the communication line disconnection 1 with the main control board. When the code 0x46 is set, it indicates that the disconnection control board detects the communication line disconnection 2 with the main control board. When the code 0x47 is set, it indicates that the payout control board has detected the reception command abnormality 1 with the main control board. When the code 0x48 is set, it indicates that the payout control board detects the reception command abnormality 2 with the main control board. When the code 0x49 is set, it indicates that the payout control board detects the reception command abnormality 3 with the main control board.

  When the code 0x4A is set, it indicates that an opening error of the glass door or cell (front frame) is detected on the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x4B is set, it indicates that an operation error of the firing motor is detected by the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x4C is set, it indicates that an origin detection error of the firing motor is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x4D is set, it indicates that the firing speed error 1 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x4E is set, it indicates that the firing speed error 2 is detected on the payout control board. If the code 0x4F is set, it indicates that the game ball shortage error 1 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x50 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 1 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x51 is set, it indicates that the game ball shortage error 2 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x52 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 2 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x53 is set, it indicates that the game ball transport error 3 is detected on the payout control board.

  Further, when the code 0x54 is set, it indicates that an excessive game ball error is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x55 is set, it indicates that the game end detection error 1 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x56 is set, it indicates that the game end detection error 2 is detected on the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x57 is set, it indicates that the game ball under-count error is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x58 is set, it indicates that a game board clogging error is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x59 is set, it indicates that the foul ball detection error 1 is detected on the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x5A is set, it indicates that the foul ball detection error 2 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x5B is set, it indicates that the out ball detection error 1 is detected on the payout control board. When the code 0x5C is set, it indicates that the out ball detection error 2 is detected on the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x5D is set, it indicates that a doffing switch error is detected on the payout control board. In addition, when the code 0x5E is set, it indicates that a ball removal motor origin sensor error is detected on the payout control board. Further, when the code 0x5F is set, it indicates that a ball removal error is detected on the payout control board.

  The communication disconnection request command transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 25 requests the P unit to disconnect the communication connection. As shown in FIG. 25, the communication disconnection request command is a command having a command length of 18 bytes including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 25, the command code of the communication disconnection request command is 0x07. Further, since the command for requesting communication disconnection only requests disconnection of the communication connection, no specific data is included, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The response of the communication disconnection response transmitted from the P platform shown in FIG. 26 to the CU notifies the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received. Note that when the communication disconnection request command is received, the P units disconnect the communication connection and stop the game (ball launch). As shown in FIG. 26, the response to the communication disconnection response is a response with a command length of 18 bytes including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 26, the command code of the response of the communication disconnection response is 0x17. Further, since the response of the communication disconnection response is only to notify the reception of the communication disconnection request command, it does not include specific data and the command size is 0 byte.

  The card insertion request command transmitted from the CU to the P unit shown in FIG. 27 notifies the card ID of the inserted card to the P unit. As shown in FIG. 27, a card insertion request command includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, an 8-byte card ID, a 1-byte card type, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). ) Including a command length of 27 bytes. As shown in FIG. 27, the command code of the card insertion request command is 0x08, and the command size of specific data is 9 bytes.

  Of the specific data of the card insertion request command, the card ID indicates the ID of the card inserted into the CU. The card type indicates the type of card inserted in the CU. In this case, if the value specified by the card type is 0x00, it indicates that the card inserted into the CU is a general card (visitor card). Further, if the value designated by the card type is 0x01, it indicates that the card inserted into the CU is a membership card. Further, if the value designated by the card type is 0x02, it indicates that the card inserted into the CU is a test card.

  The response of the card insertion response transmitted from the platform P to the CU shown in FIG. 28 is to transmit a response to the card insertion request to the CU. As shown in FIG. 28, the response of the card insertion response is a command length 19 including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte processing result, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). This is a byte response. As shown in FIG. 28, the command code of the response of the card insertion response is 0x18, and the command size of specific data is 1 byte.

  The processing result, which is specific data of the response of the card insertion response, indicates the processing result for the card insertion request from the CU. If the value specified in the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value specified in the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG. However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the processing result is not NG.

  The card return request command transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 29 is to transmit a card return request to the P units. As shown in FIG. 29, the card return request command is a command having a command length of 18 bytes including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 29, the command code of the card return request command is 0x09. Further, since the card return request command only transmits the card return request, it does not include specific data, and the command size is 0 byte.

  The response of the card return response transmitted from the P platform to the CU shown in FIG. 30 is to transmit the card ID received when the card is inserted to the CU. As shown in FIG. 30, the response of the card return response includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte processing result, an 8-byte card ID, a 1-byte card type, and 16 This is a response with a command length of 28 bytes including a byte message authentication code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 30, the command code of the response of the card return response is 0x19, and the command size of specific data is 10 bytes.

  Among the specific data of the card return response, the processing result indicates the processing result for the card return request from the CU. If the value specified in the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value specified in the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG. However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the processing result is not NG. When configuring the gaming machine so that the processing result may be NG, if the processing result is NG, the card ID and the card type in the response of the card return response shall be indefinite values. To do.

  The card ID indicates the ID of the returned card. The card type indicates the type of the returned card. In this case, if the value specified by the card type is 0x00, it indicates that the returned card is a general card (visitor card). Further, if the value specified by the card type is 0x01, it indicates that the returned card is a membership card. Further, if the value specified by the card type is 0x02, it indicates that the returned card is a test card.

  The mode change request command transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 31 requests the P units to shift the operation mode. As shown in FIG. 31, the mode change request command includes a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte mode transition designation, a 1-byte mode transition additional information, and a 16-byte message authentication. A command having a command length of 20 bytes including a code (MAC). As shown in FIG. 31, the command code of the mode change request command is 0x0A, and the command size of specific data is 2 bytes.

  Of the specific data of the mode change request command, the mode shift designation indicates the type of operation mode to be transferred, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. If Bit 0 is set to “1”, it indicates that the operation mode is to be shifted. If Bit1 is set to “1”, it indicates that the test mode is shifted to. If Bit 2 is set to “1”, it indicates that the mode is shifted to the maintenance mode. If Bit3 is set to “1”, it indicates that the test mode is to be entered. Bit 4 to Bit 7 are unused bits.

  Further, the mode transition additional information indicates detailed contents at the time of mode transition.

  The response of the mode change response transmitted from the P platform to the CU shown in FIG. 32 is to transmit a response to the mode change request to the CU. As shown in FIG. 32, the response of the mode change response includes a command length 19 including a 1-byte command code, a 1-byte command size, a 1-byte processing result, and a 16-byte message authentication code (MAC). This is a byte response. As shown in FIG. 32, the command code of the response of the mode change response is 0x1A, and the command size of specific data is 1 byte.

  The processing result that is specific data of the response of the mode change response indicates the processing result for the mode change request. If the value specified in the processing result is 0x00, it indicates that the processing result is OK. Further, if the value specified in the processing result is 0x01, it indicates that the processing result is NG.

  Next, a process executed by the CPU in the control unit 323 of the CU and a process executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, “game balls” indicates game ball total number information, and “addition balls” indicates the number of balls obtained by adding game ball acquisition number information and back ball addition information. The “subtracted ball count” indicates information on the number of game balls fired.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the P platform will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the P units, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 33, the period from when the CU receives a response from the P platform until it transmits the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and the P platform at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P platform, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, 100 game balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, the response of the motion response for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls is sequentially transmitted from the P platform to the CU at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the changes in the points on the P platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms. However, the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this, for example, the transmission interval may be P emission time intervals. It is also possible to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a process when communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU transmits a command to the P units, the same command is transmitted to the P units again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to P devices. If no response is received from the P units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that communication is abnormal at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused by the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 4 or the disconnection of the connection wiring or the power supply of the P units.

  The CU makes an authentication request to the P devices in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of this authentication request will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, processing when a communication disconnection is detected on the P platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P machine, and the P machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units continues for one second, the P unit determines that the communication is interrupted, stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 and prohibits the game. Transition to the unconnected state. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, disconnection of the connection wiring, or power supply disconnection of the CU, as described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence of FIG. 36 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 38). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping the hitting motor 18 to stop the game in the P platform. First, a communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU. In this communication control IC authentication sequence, between the CU and the communication control IC inside the CU (specifically, between the control unit 323 inside the CU and the gaming machine communication unit 325), for example, the control unit 323 and Processing such as authenticating various IDs backed up with the gaming machine communication unit 325 is performed.

  Next, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. In this case, the P platform transmits the held chip ID (main chip ID, payout chip ID). Then, the CU authenticates the P units by determining whether or not the chip ID received from the P units matches the chip ID backed up by the CU itself.

  Next, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P units. In response to this, the P machine sets the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control board 17), and returns it to the CU as a recovery response response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), previous ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, and the term “recovery data” in the subsequent flowcharts means the various data shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. In this embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the last SQN transmitted by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the connection time (communication start time) included in the recovery response response matches the communication start time backed up by the CU itself, and the same P units as the previous CU are connected. It is determined that the recovery process is in progress. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, it determines that the communication command has occurred and the CU retransmits the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the P units, updates the sequence number to “0”, and initiates a communication start request (recovery clear ON). Is sent to the P units. In response, the P unit clears the recovery data and backs up the data at the new connection time received from the CU. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to P machines. In response to this, the P unit backs up the data of SQN = 1, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0. In addition, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting ports 1 and the number of starting ports 2 that are current ball related information to zero. Then, as for the P platform, as the operation response, SQN = 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 0, and the game prohibition ( (Game stop state) response is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of starting ports 1 = 0, and the cumulative number of starting ports 2 times = 0.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request and an operation instruction of SQN = n to the P machines, and the P machine that receives it sends a game permission rejection OFF as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port 1 count = 0, start port 2 count = 0, and a game permission response are returned to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the processing of the connection sequence when the communication connection between the CU and the P platform is reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power is turned on while holding the card in FIG. 50, or when the P units in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when resuming the connection sequence, the CU resumes the connection sequence in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 38), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 57), or the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the P unit, and a When it is determined that any one of -c is determined, it is determined that the normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 37 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 36, and here, differences will be mainly described.

  First, as in FIG. 36, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU, and the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Next, as in FIG. 36, a recovery request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and a recovery response response is returned from the P units to the CU.

  Here, in the connection sequence of FIG. 36, since the power is on, the CU sends a recovery clear ON communication start request command to the P units, and the P unit receives it and clears the recovery data. In addition, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and the previous ball related information and current ball related information are all cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 37, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, after starting the recovery process, the CU corrects the game balls and the like in accordance with the contents of the recovery data on the P side included in the recovery response (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.). Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired, performs a process of correcting the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls, and recovers data from the corrected number of game balls and P units. Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs correction processing to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the connection time, which is the time at the time of reconnection, at the stage where the recovery process is completed. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of game balls currently included in the game is converted into a single-handed ball. “Mochitama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (such as a card) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, as in the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 36, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0 is backed up, and the added ball number, the subtracted ball number, the start port Each counter value of 1 time and 2 times of the start port is cleared to 0.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. This standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P units, a card is not inserted in the CU, and the lending button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting ports = 0, the number of starting ports 2 = 0, And game permission data is transmitted. The CU backs up SQN = n + 2 every time an operation instruction command is transmitted. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the P platform, data of SQN = n + 2 is transmitted. In response to this, the P-unit backs up SQN = n + 3, the previous added number of balls = 0, the previous subtracted number of balls = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0, and the added number of balls. The counter values of the number of subtraction balls, the number of times of starting port, the number of times of starting port 2 and the number of game balls are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 times = 0, the number of start ports 2 times = 0, and the game permission Send the response to the CU. In the CU, every time the response of the operation response from the P unit is received, the number of game balls = 0, the total number of additional balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the total of starting port 1 = 0, and the total of starting port 2 = Back up 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, processing when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 39, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and a probability change big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being sent and received between the P-unit and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command with no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In response to this, in the P unit, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 13, the previous start port number of times = 1, and the previous start port number of times = 1 are backed up and the number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (number of added balls) −13 (number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting ports 1 and the number of starting ports 2 are cleared to zero.

  And, as for the P platform, as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 1, the game permission, the special prize A response of OFF and probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P unit in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 game balls are shot into the game area 27 in one minute, so one game ball is put into the game area 27 in 0.6 seconds. Will be driven. As described with reference to FIG. 33, since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of subtraction balls from the previous response transmission to the current response transmission is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port 1 total = 1 and start port 2 total = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of times of starting port = 2, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P-unit, SQN = n + 3 is backed up, the previous added ball number = 120, the previous subtracted ball number = 20, the previous start port number of times = 1, and the previous start port number of times = 2, and the game ball Number = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting ports 1 and the number of starting ports 2 are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, the number of subtraction balls = 20, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 2, the game permission, the special prize The response of ON and probability change ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100, corrects the number of game balls in that 1100, and backs up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 120, the total number of subtracted balls = 20, starting port 1 cumulative = 2, and starting port 2 cumulative = 2. Further, the CU detects that “special prize” and “probability change” have started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a process in the case where it is detected that there is no game ball while playing P games will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, and first, the CU backs up SQN = n and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P platform, SQN = n + 1, the previous added ball number = 3, the previous subtracted ball number = 18, the previous start port number of times = 1, and the previous start port number of times = 1 are backed up. Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting ports 1 and the number of starting ports 2 are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for P, the operation response is as follows: SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 5, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 18, 1 start port = 1, 2 start port = 1, game permission, special prize A response of OFF and probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. The CU calculates SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5, and then corrects and backs up the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18, and the starting port 1 The cumulative total = 0 and the starting port 2 cumulative = 0 are backed up. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports = 0, the start Mouth 2 times = 0. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, in the P platform, the absence of balls is detected, and the payout control board 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 and cannot hit the balls into the game area 27. Control to the game prohibited state. It should be noted that only the ball hitting is stopped, and if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued. In addition, when there is a start memory at the start port number of times or the start port number of times at the stage when the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the memory is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P-unit, SQN = n + 3 was backed up, and the previous added number of balls = 0, the previous subtracted number of balls = 5, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 were created, and a response was created. Thereafter, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of times of the starting port, and the number of times of the starting port 2 are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for P, the operation response is SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 5, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 0, the game permission, the special prize A response of OFF, probability variation OFF, and the number of game balls 0 = ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port 1 total = 1 and start port 2 total = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform hitting ball stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When the ball launch stop control is performed for the first time on the P platform side, a game ball may be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new subtraction ball number may be generated during that time. On the other hand, there is an inconvenience that a new subtraction ball number is generated even if the game ball number is already “0”, and the game ball number becomes negative after all. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes zero is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  In this way, the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control adapted to the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although the example in which the payout control board 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 4) may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control board 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits the driving of the ball striking motor 18.

  With reference to FIG. 41, processing of the CU and the P platform when a card is inserted will be described. At the time of insertion of this card, the P units execute the same processing as the standby processing shown in FIG. 38 without executing any special processing due to insertion of the card.

  On the other hand, in the CU, in the command transmission process to the P machines, the same process as that in the standby mode shown in FIG. 38 is executed. When the card is inserted, the CU outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer 327, and the card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the taken-in card. Card insertion processing such as receiving a card is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is done by inquiring, for example, an upper server such as the hall management computer 1 about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or the possession ball or prepaid balance. This means that the process of displaying on the display unit 312 and displaying on the P-side display unit 54 while the authentication is in progress is being executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 and the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display 312 is being inquired and transmits an operation instruction including ON during card insertion processing to the P units. In the P platform, upon receiving the operation instruction command, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 displays the display command. Control is performed to display that an inquiry about the card inserted into the device 54 is being inquired (see FIG. 82).

  After that, as for P units, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 times = 0, the number of start ports 2 times = 0, the game prohibition and special prizes A response including OFF of probability change is transmitted to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the probability change are OFF in a state in which Bits 0 to 6 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG.

  The CU determines the balance and the ball when the card balance and the ball that has been inserted as a result of the inquiry about the card balance can be confirmed. Then, the CU transmits a card insertion request command including the card ID and the card type to the P units, and notifies the card ID and the card type. Then, the P platform backs up the card ID and card type specified by the received card insertion request command and returns a card insertion response response to the CU. In addition, the CU performs control to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312 and is also transmitting the confirmed possession ball (5000) as a game ball to the gaming machine (P units). The display during the addition display is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 82).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of balls required for addition) = 5000, and holding balls = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of the ball is finalized.

  Next, a command including addition present, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, addition request ball count = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units as operation instructions. In the P unit, when the payout control board 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000, display control including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 is performed. The command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 5000 balls are being added as game balls (during addition display) (see FIG. 82).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the processing at the time of replay that consumes the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 42, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 42 is similar to the process for prepaid consumption shown in FIG. 43 described later. On the CU side, SQN = n + 2 when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card. , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls required for addition) = 125 and the number of stored balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the prepaid balance in FIG. 43, which will be described later, is data in monetary units, while the holding ball in FIG. 42 is data in units of balls, so it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125. It is.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “addition present”, “addition display being displayed (replay) ON”, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, subtraction request ball number = 0 to the P units as operation instructions. In response to this, the payout control board 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  The other processing is the same as the processing in FIG. 43 described later. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a process for consuming the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the processing of FIG. 43, it is assumed that the prepaid balance is “1000” and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command of “no addition”, “addition display is in progress (prepaid lending)”, “SQN = n”, “addition request ball number = 0”, and “subtraction request ball number = 0” is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P-unit, the response is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 50, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 = 0, the number of start ports 2 = 0, the game permission , Special prize OFF and probability variation OFF responses are returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of “addition present”, “addition display in progress (prepaid lending)” ON, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0 to P units. In response to this, the payout control board 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of times of the starting port, and the number of times of the starting port 2 to 0, to the current number of gaming balls 50 On the other hand, the number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 obtained by adding the number 125 of addition request balls.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, number of times of start port = 0, number of times of start port 2 = 0, A response of game permission, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls required for subtraction) = 175, and the number of additional balls The total = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting port 1 total = 0, and the starting port 2 total = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls to be added and the number of balls requested to be added is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a process of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service etc.) according to an instruction from the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 (see FIGS. 93 to 97) and places a wagon order so that the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk provides a wagon service according to the order contents entered on the remote control. FIG. 44 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls is generated in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order is generated, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of game balls used when the wagon order is generated, as SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command with subtraction, subtraction display (wagon service) ON, SQN = n + 2, addition request ball number = 0 and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU displays on the display 312 a display indicating that the subtraction is being performed (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is executed by the payout control board 17. In FIG. 44, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control board 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, the display control includes ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. The command is transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as game balls (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P-unit backs up SQN = n + 3, the previous number of added balls = 0, the previous number of subtracted balls = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0 and the previous start port number of times = 0, and the added number of balls, subtracted The values of the counters of the number of balls, the number of times of the starting port, and the number of times of the starting port 2 are cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, the subtraction rejection is OFF, SQN = n + 3, the number of currently playing balls = 700, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 0, a game permission, a special prize OFF, and a probability change OFF response are returned.

  Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls to be added) −0 (number of subtraction balls) = 700, and game balls The number is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of starting ports 1 = 0, and the cumulative number of starting ports 2 = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 44, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 42, the accumulated (contained) consumption based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU accepts the retained consumption.

  In this way, the reasons for determining different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumption of stored balls based on the instruction of the CU” are as follows.

  At the stage when the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls, such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, as for “consumed (consumed) consumption based on CU instruction”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls. Therefore, when the instruction reaches P machines, P machines have memorized. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “consumed ball consumption based on a CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts accumulated ball consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, when the operation instruction from the CU to the P unit and the operation response from the P unit to the CU is performed in response, the return button 322 is pressed down, the CU As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units. In the P platform, in accordance with the instruction with the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting stop state. In addition, the P platform transmits a response including data of prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response. Thereafter, a waiting time of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the time from when the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 to all flow out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. During the wait time of 10 seconds, polling is continued between the P units and the CU, and an operation instruction command and an operation response response are mutually transmitted and received.

  When 10 seconds have elapsed, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, the commands of no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + N to the P units. Then, as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + N + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 times = 0, the number of start ports 2 times = 0, the game prohibited, the game A response of completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. This “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls in the P units. The number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls is changed by the floating ball. If a prize is generated by a floating ball, or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “added ball number”.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 2 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting ports 1 times, the number of starting ports 2 times” included in the operation response, the stored “number of gaming balls, total number of added balls, total number of subtracted balls, Each data of “starting port 1 total winning number, starting port 2 total winning number” is updated. As a result, the number of game balls at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU transmits commands including clear request, clear display ON, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + N + 2 to the P units as operation instructions. Thereafter, the CU causes the display 312 to display a message indicating that clearing is being performed (clearing is being displayed) (see FIGS. 102 and 103). This “clear request exists” is data instructing initialization of the number of P game balls.

  In the P platform, the payout control board 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect production control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU receives the input of a “signal requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, a fingerprint authentication unit for authenticating a player's fingerprint is provided in the CU. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. Upon receipt of a clear request, clear display, card return processing ON, and SQN = n + N + 2 commands, the P devices clear (initialize) the stored data values to zero. Here, the data cleared by the P platform is the current ball related information and the previous ball related information shown in FIG. As a result, the added ball counter, the subtracted ball counter, the starting port 1 winning counter, the starting port 2 winning counter, and the gaming ball counter value, and the added ball number stored as the previous counter value. The data of the number of subtraction balls, the starting opening 1 winning number, and the starting opening 2 winning number are cleared (initialized).

  Next, as the operation response, the P units are clear rejection OFF indicating that the clear request is not rejected, SQN = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports = 1 time = 0. The response of start port 2 times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and holding balls = 500. This holding ball = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of game balls received immediately before the clear request, to the holding ball.

  Next, the CU transmits a card return request command to the P units. The P platform transmits a response to the card return response including the card ID and the card type (card ID and card type received from the CU and backed up when the card is inserted) to the CU.

  After that, the CU records the holding ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command of no prohibition request, no clear request, OFF during clear display, and OFF during card return processing is transmitted to the P units. Then, as for the P platform, SQN = m + 1, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports = 1, the number of start ports 2 = 0, the game prohibited, the game A response of completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  With reference to FIG. 46, the process when the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, when a trouble occurs such that a game ball that is thrown into the game area 27 in the P platform is caught on the game board surface, and the player calls the attendant at the game hall, An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door 6 by operating the remote controller that it has is transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door 6 is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform so as to perform the ball hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a 10-second wait is provided. During this time, the CU continues to poll by sending a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, a prohibition request, to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has passed, a command including a glass opening request for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 to be opened and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, the P door energizes the glass door opening solenoid 10 to unlock the glass door 6 to open the glass door 6, and turns on the bit during the development of the glass door. Until it is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development underway as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a glass opening rejection ON response is not returned, it is determined that the glass door 6 has been opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a process for unlocking and releasing the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote control to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 5, infrared rays including a cell release command signal are output from the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands including data such as prohibition request presence and cell opening request absence for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor and controls the hitting ball firing stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is received. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases the front frame 5 by exciting the front frame opening solenoid 11 to unlock the front frame 5. Then, the bit during cell development is turned ON, and thereafter ON is maintained until the cell is closed (until a detection signal is input from the front frame closing detector 13).

  And as for the P platform, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request as an operation response, a game prohibition indicating that the hitting ball is stopped, a cell development student indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including the data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  With reference to FIG. 48, the process when a banknote is inserted in CU and money_receiving | payment is demonstrated. First, the player performs an operation of inserting a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU in order to deposit the card. Then, the CU starts a deposit process for updating the balance of the card according to the amount of the inserted bill, and as an operation instruction, no addition, ON during deposit process, SQN = n + 2, number of balls requested for addition = 0, And a command including the number of subtraction request balls = 0 is transmitted to the P units. Then, as for the P response, the addition permission / denial OFF, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports 1 = 0, the number of start ports 2 = 0, A response including game permission, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is returned to the CU. Further, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display indicating that the deposit process is being performed (deposit process is being displayed). Then, until the payment process is completed, polling is continued between the P units and the CU, and an operation instruction command and an operation response response are mutually transmitted and received.

  When the balance of the card is confirmed and the deposit process is terminated, the CU includes, as operation instructions, no addition, display during deposit process OFF, SQN = n + N, addition request ball count = 0, and subtraction request ball count = 0. A command is transmitted to P units.

  With reference to FIG. 49, a process for changing the mode of the gaming machine will be described. Note that the example shown in FIG. 49 shows a case where the gaming machine is changed to the test hit mode as an example. When changing the mode, an attendant at the game hall confirms that no card is inserted in the CU, and operates the remote control that he has to change the game machine to the trial mode. Transmit to the IR photosensitive unit 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a change instruction signal to the test hit mode included in the received infrared signal to the control unit 323. The CU that has received the instruction to change to the trial mode has a mode change request command in which Bit0 (operation mode) for mode change is set to “0” and Bit1 (trial mode) is set to “1”. Is transmitted to P units. Then, the P platform transmits a response of the mode change response including the processing result OK to the CU, and shifts to the trial hit mode.

  During the test hit mode, the SQN value is only updated by one, and from the CU, commands for operation instructions including no addition, the number of balls required for addition = 0, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 0 are issued to the P units. Sent. In addition, from P units, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of times of starting port = 0, the number of times of starting port = 0, game permission, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF are included. The response of the operation response is transmitted to the CU.

  After that, when releasing the test hit mode and returning to the normal operation mode, the staff of the game hall etc. operate an IR signal to change the game machine to the operation mode by operating the remote controller that the player has. To 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs an operation mode change instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the control unit 323. The CU that has received an instruction to change to the operation mode is a mode change request command in which Bit0 (operation mode) for mode change is set to “1” and Bit1 (trial mode) is set to “0”. Is transmitted to P units. Then, the P platform transmits a response to the mode change response including the processing result OK to the CU, the trial hit mode is canceled, and the normal operation mode is entered.

  In FIG. 49, as an example, the case of changing to the test hit mode is shown, but the process for changing to the maintenance mode or the test mode is the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, processing when the CU is powered on while holding a card and an abnormality in which the P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while the card was inserted and the P unit was playing, the recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 34, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the P units. Nevertheless, if the response from the P units is not returned, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the P units. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. Execute the control.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is input to the control unit 323. Is done. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. Then, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  After that, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P devices and performs a restart process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 37). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state where a card is inserted (a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction between the time when P connection failure occurs and the time when the connection sequence (see FIG. 37) is restarted and the first operation response is transmitted by P units. The process when the number of balls (for example, r) has occurred is performed by the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 37, the CU receives the recovery response from the P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls as the calculation result. = J + r is backed up. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 37, SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of game balls are transmitted to P units, and the SQN of P units and the number of game balls And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, processing when the operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 39 and the like, the P platform receives the data of the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number stored in the current ball related information storage area by receiving the operation instruction command from the CU. The previous ball-related information storage area is backed up as the previous addition / subtraction number of balls and the number of previous start openings, and the data of the current addition / subtraction number of balls and the current start opening number stored in the current ball-related information storage area are cleared to zero. In the case of FIG. 51, the operation instruction from the CU has not yet reached the P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 34, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a process when the operation response from the P platform (response to the absence of requested operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 52, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the SQN value of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is performed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction ball count and current start port count data are backed up and stored in the previous addition / subtraction ball count and the previous start port count, and a command for motion response is created and the current addition / subtraction ball count and the current start as current ball related information. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, as for the P response, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 0 is CU. Send to.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The previous addition / subtraction balls as the previous ball-related information and the previous start port count data are not cleared without clearing the current addition / subtraction balls as the current ball-related information and Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the number of current starting ports. As a result, the previous added ball number = 3 + 3 = 6, the previous subtracted ball number = 13 + 8 = 21, the previous start port number of times = 1 + 0 = 1, and the previous start port number of times = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added / subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. Then, as an operation response, the P platform sends a response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 505, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 1 to the CU. Send. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage for the previous ball related information, as described above, creates an operation response response, and sends it back to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 485, number of additional balls = 12, number of subtracting balls = 47, number of times of starting port = 2, number of times of starting port 2 = 2 is sent to the CU as an operation response. To do.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 52, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is not included. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, processing when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, and the number of balls to be added when there is a replay operation for saving balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125. First, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information. Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports = 1, and the start port 2 as motion responses. The response of the number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a process when the operation response from the P units (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls = 520 and an operation for using a game as a replay of a stored ball replay or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and an addition request for the number of 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P platform, as the current ball-related information, adds the number of balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of times of starting port = 1, the number of times of starting port = 2 = 0, and the data of SQN = n + 1, While the backup ball related information storage area is backed up, the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 0 are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls to be added = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing in FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports 1 = 0, and the number of start ports 2 = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 630, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of times of starting port = 1, and number of times of starting port 2 = 1 It is sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port number of times = 2, and start port number of times = 2 response are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach the P units will be described. A case will be described in which an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. 51, every time an additional subtraction ball number and a start winning are generated, the data is accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, the response of subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of playing balls = 190, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 36, number of times of starting port = 1, and number of times of starting port 2 = 1 as CU responses Send to.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game ball in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of balls required for subtraction to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls for the first time after the response including the response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P devices for the period of waiting for the operation response from the P devices. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a process when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P platform, as the current ball-related information, adds the number of balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of times of starting port = 1, the number of times of starting port = 2 = 0, and the data of SQN = n + 1, While the backup ball related information storage area is backed up, the number of game balls = 520−300 + 3−13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 0 are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the subtraction request ball count = 300, but the game ball is not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing in FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports 1 = 0, and the number of start ports 2 = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, the addition response OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 205, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 21, the number of start ports = 1, and the number of start ports 2 = 1 as operation responses It is sent to the CU as a response.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while subtraction request ball count = 300 is received, subtraction update associated therewith is not performed, and double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request is not performed. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port 1 times = 2, and start port 2 times = 2 responses are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, the subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and the subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Not performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of processing when the P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and first, a command of no request and SQN = n is transmitted from the CU to the P units as an operation instruction. . The P platform calculates a game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500, and calculates a motion response including data of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports, the number of start ports 2 times, and SQN = n + 1. Reply to The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects the game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as operation instructions, a command including addition request present, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to the P machines. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control board 17 to the launch control board 31, The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  Further, as the recovery data, the P-unit further has SQN = n + 3, the previous number of balls as the previous ball number = 6, the previous subtracted ball number = 36, the previous start port number of times = 2, the previous start port number of times = 2, As the current number of balls, the following data is stored: number of currently playing balls = 460, number of currently added balls = 3, number of currently subtracted balls = 13, number of current start ports = 1, and number of current start ports = 2.

  Next, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Note that, unlike the power activation shown in FIG. 36, when the communication shown in FIG. 57 is interrupted, only the chip ID authentication sequence between the CU and the P platform is performed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Execute. Next, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 37, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence has been resumed after disconnecting the communication by sending a communication disconnection request, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 37 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power-on in FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 57, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a description will be given of a process in the case where P units return a subtraction rejection response to a CU subtraction request. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like occurs and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command with subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, the P units have subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, and the number of times of starting port = 2. , And the response of the start port 2 times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to lack of game balls”.

  Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a process when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU requests the P units to prohibit the game, and clears it as an operation instruction to the P units. A command including data indicating no request, clear display OFF, and card return processing ON is transmitted to the P units (not shown in FIG. 59). In response to this, the P machine returns a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response (illustration is omitted in FIG. 59). Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 45, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a clear request presence and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. Receiving it, the P unit is cleared to indicate that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports = 1, the start The response of the operation response of mouth 2 times = 2 is transmitted to the CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancellation processing. This clear cancellation process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but cannot be cleared and cancelled” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 60, a process when P units respond with a permission rejection response to a CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be fired, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a process when the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When the input of the opening instruction of the glass door 6 is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 62, the CU first has a prohibition request as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. And a command of no glass opening request is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for glass opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “The glass door cannot be opened” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a process when the P units return a cell opening rejection response to the CU cell opening request will be described. When an input of a cell opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 63, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, referring to FIG. 64, during an operation instruction interval during normal play (a state in which normal addition / subtraction data is exchanged) (after receiving an operation response, until the next operation instruction is transmitted) A recovery process will be described in the case where the power supply is cut off or the communication connection is cut off between the power supply and the communication with the same CU connected to the P stand. The command of operation instruction is transmitted to the P machines in the state of SQN = n at the initial number of game balls = 520, and the P machines have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, and the subtraction as the operation response. A response including addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. When the response reaches the CU, when the power is cut off at the CU after the SQN = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 500, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, a communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 37, and a chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and the P unit. Is executed. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 3, the number of previously subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current ball Current number of game balls = 470, number of currently added balls = 6, number of currently subtracted balls = 36, current start port number of times = 2, current start port number of times = 2 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 65, the power supply or the communication connection is disconnected when the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and the power supply is connected with the same CU and P units connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. The initial number of game balls = 520, and the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 23, and the number of start openings one time. = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 1 is sent to the CU, and after the CU modifies it to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU sends an operation instruction with no request and SQN = n + 2. Send command to P units. If the command does not reach P units and a power interruption occurs in the CU immediately after that, P units cannot receive commands for more than 1 second after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to an unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 is stopped to make the play stop state.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, a communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 37, and a chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and the P unit. Is executed. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 3, the number of previously subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current ball Current number of game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, number of currently added balls = 6, number of currently subtracted balls = 36, current start port number of times = 1, current start port number of times = 2, and recovery response To the CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is one more advanced than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response, Process to correct backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 66, the power supply or communication connection is cut off in a state where the operation response has not been reached during normal play, and the power supply is connected with the same CU and P units connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent back and forth between the CU and the P machine, and then a command of no request and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 is sent to the P machine. After that, P units send a response of SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 470, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports = 1, and the number of start ports 2 = 2 to the CU. did. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, a communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 37, and a chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and the P unit. Is executed. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the previous number of subtracted balls = 36, the previous start port 1 number = 2, the previous start port 2 times = 2, the current ball Current number of game balls = 470-3 = 467, number of currently added balls = 0, number of currently subtracted balls = 3, current start port number of times = 0, current start port number of times = 0, and recovery response To the CU.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previously added balls) +0 (the number of currently added balls) −36 (the number of previously subtracted balls) −3 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 467. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (previously added number of balls) + 0 (currently added number of balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of previously subtracted balls) + 3 (currently subtracted number of balls), starting port 1 cumulative number = 2 (previous starting port) 1 count) +0 (current start port 1 count), start port 2 cumulative = 2 (previous start port 2 count) +0 (current start port 2 count).

  Next, referring to FIG. 67, when the power supply or communication connection is cut off during the operation instruction interval during normal play, the power supply is cut off while different CUs and P units are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. Similar to FIG. 64, an operation instruction command is transmitted to the P machines in the state of the initial number of game balls = 520 and SQN = n, and P machines have SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 500, addition as an operation response. A response including addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. When the response reaches the CU, when the power is cut off at the CU after the SQN = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 500, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 67, the state where the CU1 and the P stand 1 are initially connected is switched to the state where the CU2 and the P stand 1 are connected and the CU1 and the P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and started up, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 67, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the previous number of subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 470, the current number of added balls = 6, the current number of subtracted balls = 36, the current start port number of times = 2, the current start port number of times = 2 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 68, the power supply or the communication connection is disconnected when the operation instruction has not been reached during normal play, and the power supply is connected with different CUs and P units connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. As in FIG. 65, assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 500, number of additional balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 23, the response of the number of times of starting port 1 = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 1 is sent to the CU, and after the CU corrects to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU requests as an operation instruction. A command of nothing and SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P units. If the command does not reach P units and a power interruption occurs in the CU immediately after that, P units cannot receive commands for more than 1 second after sending the last response, as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to an unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 is stopped to make the play stop state.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 68, the state is switched from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected to the state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and started up, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 68, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the previous number of subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 470, the current number of added balls = 6, the current number of subtracted balls = 36, the current start port number of times = 2, the current start port number of times = 2 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 69, the power supply or the communication connection is disconnected in a state where the operation response has not been reached during normal play, and the power supply is connected in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process in the case of recovery from disconnection or communication disconnection will be described. Similarly to FIG. 66, after the initial number of game balls = 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent and received back and forth between the CU and the P unit, and then no request and SQN = n + 2 operation instruction commands are received. After being transmitted to the P units, the P units have an operation response as follows: SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, 1 start port = 2, 2 start ports = 2 Was sent to the CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 69, the state where the CU1 and the P stand 1 are initially connected is switched to the state where the CU2 and the P stand 1 are connected and the CU1 and the P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and started up, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 69, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 2, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 467, the current number of added balls = 0, the current number of subtracted balls = 3, the current start port number of times = 0, the current start port number of times = 0 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 70, when the power supply cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before the addition request arrives, the power cut off occurs when the same CU and P stand are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. When this command does not reach the P platform, the P platform detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 1 second since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P base, similarly to the process of FIG. Unlike the power activation shown in FIG. 36, when the communication shown in FIG. 70 is interrupted, only the chip ID authentication sequence between the CU and the P platform is performed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Execute. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 3, the number of previously subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current ball Current number of game balls = 470, number of currently added balls = 6, number of currently subtracted balls = 36, current start port number of times = 2, current start port number of times = 2 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the P base side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side. Therefore, the process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response is performed. Do. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 71, the power supply or communication connection is cut off on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request, and the same CU and P stand are connected. The recovery process when recovering from power interruption or communication interruption will be described. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls to be added = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request present, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units responded as SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port = 2, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 2. To the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, a communication control IC authentication sequence is executed in the CU as in the process of FIG. 37, and a chip ID authentication sequence is performed between the CU and the P unit. Is executed. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the previous number of subtracted balls = 36, the previous start port 1 number = 2, the previous start port 2 times = 2, the current ball Current number of game balls = 592, current number of added balls = 0, current number of subtracted balls = 3, current start port number of times = 0, current start port number of times = 0 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  The CU determines that the communication partner is the same and is transmitting operation instructions, and that the P SQNs have advanced by 1, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (previous addition ball number) +0 (current addition ball number) −36 (previous subtraction ball number) −3 (current subtraction ball number) = 592, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (previously added number of balls) + 0 (currently added number of balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of previously subtracted balls) + 3 (currently subtracted number of balls), starting port 1 cumulative number = 2 (previous starting port) 1 count) +0 (current start port 1 count), start port 2 cumulative = 2 (previous start port 2 count) +0 (current start port 2 count).

  Next, referring to FIG. 72, when the power is cut or the communication connection is cut on the CU side before the addition request is reached, the power is turned off in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. As in FIG. 70, the initial number of game balls = 520, the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted / received between the CU and P units, and the number of additional balls generated during that time The lending button 321 was pressed down when the gaming ball became 500 based on the number of balls subtracted. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to P units. When this command does not reach the P platform, the P platform detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 1 second since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 72, the state is switched from the state in which CU1 and P base 1 are initially connected to the state in which CU2 and P base 1 are connected and CU1 and P base 2 are connected. Shall. Then, after the reconnection sequence is started in a state where the connection state between the CU and the P stand is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed with the table. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 72, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the previous number of subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 470, the current number of added balls = 6, the current number of subtracted balls = 36, the current start port number of times = 2, the current start port number of times = 2 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls is maintained at the value 625 before the power is cut off, the accumulated ball cumulative = 0, the subtracted ball cumulative = 0, the starting port 1 total = 0, the starting port 2 total = 0. And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 73, when a power cut or a communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response to the addition request, a state where different CUs and P units are connected. The recovery process when recovering from power interruption or communication interruption will be described. As in FIG. 71, the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted / received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of added / subtracted balls generated during that time After the game ball became 500 based on the above, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls to be added = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands of addition request present, SQN = n + 2, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units responded as SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port = 2, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 2. To the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the state is switched from the state where CU1 and P stand 1 are initially connected to the state where CU2 and P stand 1 are connected and CU1 and P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and started up, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 2, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 592, the number of currently added balls = 0, the number of currently subtracted balls = 3, the current start port number of times = 0, the current start port number of times = 0 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls is maintained at the value 625 before the power is cut off, the accumulated ball cumulative = 0, the subtracted ball cumulative = 0, the starting port 1 total = 0, the starting port 2 total = 0. And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 74, when power is cut off or communication connection is cut off at the CU side before the subtraction request is reached, the power is turned off while the same CU and P unit are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a wagon service request or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the subtraction request is present, SQN = n + 2, and the subtraction request ball. Number = 300 commands are transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the ball-hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 1 second after the last response is transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P base, similarly to the process of FIG. Unlike the power activation shown in FIG. 36, when the communication shown in FIG. 74 is interrupted, only the chip ID authentication sequence between the CU and the P platform is performed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Execute. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 3, the number of previously subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current ball Current number of game balls = 470, number of currently added balls = 6, number of currently subtracted balls = 36, current start port number of times = 2, current start port number of times = 2 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  The CU determines that the subtraction request has not been executed in the P units because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side has advanced by 1, and backup is performed based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Process to correct the value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start Correction is made so that the total number of mouth 1 = 2 and the total number of starting port 2 = 2.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75, in the stage before the arrival of the operation response to the subtraction request, the power supply or communication connection is cut off on the CU side, and the same CU and P stand are connected. A recovery process when the system recovers from a power interruption or communication interruption in a state will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 command is transmitted to P units.

  In response to this, the P-unit responds to the CU with SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 170, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 2. Send. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the connection sequence is restarted as in FIG. 37, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU, and between the CU and the P platform. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the previous number of subtracted balls = 36, the previous start port 1 number = 2, the previous start port 2 times = 2, the current ball Current number of game balls = 167, number of currently added balls = 0, number of currently subtracted balls = 3, current start port number of times = 0, current start port number of times = 0 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response Performs processing to correct backup value based on data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previously added balls) +0 (the number of currently added balls) −36 (the number of previously subtracted balls) −3 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 467. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (previously added number of balls) + 0 (currently added number of balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of previously subtracted balls) + 3 (currently subtracted number of balls), starting port 1 cumulative number = 2 (previous starting port) 1 count) +0 (current start port 1 count), start port 2 cumulative = 2 (previous start port 2 count) +0 (current start port 2 count).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by transmitting a recovery request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU does not match the SQN transmitted from the P units, and the power supply of FIG. The connection sequence for reconnection shown in FIG. 37 is executed instead of the connection sequence for startup. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN, and the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 37). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of the subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, in the stage before the subtraction request is reached, when the power is cut off or the communication connection is cut off on the CU side, the power is turned off in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. As in FIG. 74, with the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a request for a wagon service or the like at 500, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300, with a subtraction request as an operation instruction, and SQN = A command of n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the ball-hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 1 second after the last response is transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 76, the state is switched from the state where CU1 and P stand 1 are initially connected to the state where CU2 and P stand 1 are connected and CU1 and P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, after the reconnection sequence is started in a state where the connection state between the CU and the P stand is switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in the process of FIG. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed with the table. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 76, the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the previous number of subtracted balls = 23, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 1, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 470, the current number of added balls = 6, the current number of subtracted balls = 36, the current start port number of times = 2, the current start port number of times = 2 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 77, when a power cut or a communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the subtraction request is reached, different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process when the system recovers from a power interruption or communication interruption in a state will be described. As in FIG. 75, the initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the game balls according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time When the number of wagon service requests for 300 balls is generated at the stage where the number = 500, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of subtraction request balls = 300, and there is a subtraction request as an operation instruction, SQN = n + 2 , And a command of the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to the P units.

  In response to this, the P-unit responds to the CU with SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 170, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port = 1, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 2. Send. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received for 1 second or more, it is determined that the communication is cut off, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped to play. Stop. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 77, the state where the CU1 and the P stand 1 are initially connected is switched to the state where the CU2 and the P stand 1 are connected and the CU1 and the P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and restarted, the connection sequence is restarted as in FIG. 37, and the communication control IC authentication sequence is performed inside the CU. At the same time, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 77, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 6, the number of previously subtracted balls = 36, the previous number of starting ports = 1, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 2, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 592, the number of currently added balls = 0, the number of currently subtracted balls = 3, the current start port number of times = 0, the current start port number of times = 0 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 78, when the power is cut off or the communication connection is cut on the CU side before the clear request is reached, the power is turned off while the same CU is connected to the P unit. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 78, as in the process of FIG. 45, the CU, with respect to the P units, has a prohibition request for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, card display processing OFF and card return processing ON. A command including data is transmitted to the P machines (not shown in FIG. 78). In response to this, the P machine returns a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response (illustration is omitted in FIG. 78). Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 45, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and, as an operation instruction, transmits a command including clear request presence and SQN = n + 2 to the P units, but when the command does not reach the P units, the P units When the state where the command is not received after the response is transmitted continues for 1 second, the disconnection is detected and the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to make the play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P base as in FIG. Unlike the time of power activation shown in FIG. 36, when the communication shown in FIG. 78 is interrupted, only the chip ID authentication sequence between the CU and the P platform is performed without executing the communication control IC authentication sequence inside the CU. Execute. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 0, the previous number of subtracted balls = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the current ball Current number of game balls = 500, number of currently added balls = 0, number of currently subtracted balls = 0, current start port number of times = 0, current start port number of times = 0 are stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response To do.

  The CU determines that the clear request has not reached because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side has advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform the process. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (current number of gaming balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, starting opening 1 total = 0, start port 2 total = 0.

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, the power supply or the communication connection is cut off at the CU side before the operation response to the clear request is reached, and the same CU and P stand are connected. A recovery process when the system recovers from a power interruption or communication interruption in a state will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 79, as in the process of FIG. 45, the CU, with respect to the P units, has a prohibition request for prohibiting gaming, no clear request, clear display OFF, and card return processing ON as the operation instruction. A command including data is transmitted to the P machines (not shown in FIG. 79). In response to this, the P machine sends back a response including prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition data, and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response (illustration is omitted in FIG. 79). Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 45, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and transmits a command including a clear request and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as an operation instruction.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of times of starting port = 0, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 0 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response processing corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, if the P station has not received a command for one second or more, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU, as in the process of FIG. A chip ID authentication sequence is executed in between. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 0, the previous number of subtracted balls = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the current ball As a number, the current number of game balls = 0, the current number of added balls = 0, the current number of subtracted balls = 0, the current start port number of times = 0, and the current start port number of times = 0 are stored and transmitted as a recovery response to the CU. To do.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current subtracted balls), starting port 1 cumulative = 0 (current starting port 1), starting port 2 cumulative = 0 (current starting port 2).

  Next, referring to FIG. 80, in the stage before the clear request is reached, the power is cut or the communication connection is cut on the CU side, and the power is turned off in a state where different CUs and P units are connected. Recovery processing when returning from a communication interruption will be described. As in FIG. 78, the number of game balls = 500 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 80, as in the process of FIG. 45, the CU, as an operation instruction to the P units, has a prohibition request for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, and card return processing ON. A command including data is transmitted to the P devices (not shown in FIG. 80). In response to this, the P machine returns a response including data of prohibition rejection OFF, game prohibition, and game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response (illustration is omitted in FIG. 80). Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 45, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and, as an operation instruction, transmits a command including clear request presence and SQN = n + 2 to the P units, but when the command does not reach the P units, the P units When the state where the command is not received after the response is transmitted continues for 1 second, the disconnection is detected and the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to make the play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 34, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the state is switched from the state in which CU1 and P stand 1 are initially connected to the state in which CU2 and P stand 1 are connected and CU1 and P stand 2 are connected. Shall. Then, after starting the reconnection sequence with the connection state between the CU and the P base being switched, the communication control IC authentication sequence is executed inside the CU as in FIG. The chip ID authentication sequence is executed during Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 80, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 0, the previous number of subtracted balls = 0, the previous number of starting ports = 0, the previous number of starting ports 2 = 0, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 0, the current number of added balls = 0, the current number of subtracted balls = 0, the current start port number of times = 0, the current start port number of times = 0 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, when a power cut or communication connection cut occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request arrives, different CUs and P units are connected. A recovery process when the system recovers from a power interruption or communication interruption in a state will be described. As in FIG. 79, the number of game balls = 500 when the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed. In FIG. 81, as in the process of FIG. 45, the CU has, as operation instructions, P units that have a prohibition request for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, and card return processing ON. A command including data is transmitted to P devices (not shown in FIG. 81). In response to this, the P machine returns a response including the prohibition rejection OFF, the game prohibition data, and the game completion OFF to the CU as an operation response (illustration is omitted in FIG. 81). Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 45, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and transmits a command including a clear request and SQN = n + 2 to the P units as an operation instruction.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of times of starting port = 0, and the number of times of starting port 2 = 0 are transmitted to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response processing corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 35, if the P station has not received a command for one second or more, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state.

  Next, it is assumed that the connection state between the CU and the P platform is switched for some reason during the power-off. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 81, the state where the CU1 and the P base 1 are initially connected is switched to the state where the CU2 and the P base 1 are connected and the CU1 and the P base 2 are connected. Shall. Then, when the CU and the P stand are switched and the CU is powered off and restarted, the connection sequence is restarted and the communication control IC authentication is performed within the CU as in the process of FIG. While the sequence is executed, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the CU and the P platform. Then, a recovery request command and a recovery response are exchanged between the CU and the P platform. In the example shown in FIG. 81, it is assumed that the newly connected CU2 and P stand 2 are both in the initial state, the number of game balls held by CU2 is 0, and the P stand 2 holds The number of balls added last time, the number of balls subtracted last time, the number of times of previous starting port, the number of times of previous starting port 2, the number of current game balls, the number of balls currently added, the number of balls currently subtracted, the number of current starting ports 1 time, the number of current starting ports 2 times Is assumed to be 0.

  In the P-unit 1, as recovery data, SQN = 0, as the previous number of balls, the previous number of added balls = 0, the previous number of subtracted balls = 0, the previous number of start ports = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, the current As the number of balls, the current number of game balls = 0, the current number of added balls = 0, the current number of subtracted balls = 0, the current start port number of times = 0, the current start port number of times = 0 are stored, and the recovery response is sent to CU2. Send.

  However, since the connection partner of P unit 1 has been switched to CU2, CU2 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data sent in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, the respective backup values are left at the initial values, and the number of game balls = 0, the addition ball total = 0, the subtraction ball total = 0, the start port 1 total = 0, and the start port 2 total = 0.

  On the other hand, in the P-unit 2, SQN = n, the previous added ball number = 0, the previous subtracted ball number = 0, the previous start port number of times = 0, and the previous start port number of times = 0 when the recovery data is in the initial value state. And sent to CU1 as a recovery response.

  However, since the connection partner of CU1 has been switched to the P-unit 2, the CU1 determines that the communication partner is different from that before the power interruption, and does not use the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response to correct the backup value. . Specifically, among the backup values, the number of game balls maintains the value 500 before the power-off, as it is, cumulative addition ball = 0, subtraction ball cumulative = 0, starting port 1 cumulative = 0, starting port 2 cumulative = 0 And

  Note that the unrecovered recovery data before power-off of the P stand 1 is manually corrected by performing a correction operation using a POS terminal or the like by an attendant at a game hall or the like.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P base side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 41 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 82, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command indicating that card insertion processing is OFF and addition display (card insertion) OFF is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the game is prohibited as an operation response. A response of game ball = 0 is returned from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 82, “None” in the column of “Card type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 82, the P display units 54 have the titles “0 ball” and “card balance” in the “Game ball” title column. "0 yen" is displayed in the column. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 82, the number of start times, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, the number of times of the highest consecutive number are displayed, and the number of start times between special prizes (effective start winnings between a big hit of one time and the next big hit Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Furthermore, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting one and performing a touch operation, the screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 82, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen, and the player can By selecting one and performing a touch operation, a command can be input to the CU. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, the player can replay using the possession ball or the storage ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In the state during the inquiry, the display 312 on the CU side displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. The command and the like are not transmitted, and the process can be terminated at a unique timing on the P platform side, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares a game ball by separately transferring a game ball to another person during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 83 and FIGS. 84 and 85, which will be described later, shows control that allows the player to share and transfer the game ball to another person while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 83, first, a card A as a membership card with a holding ball = 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game, even if the gaming value of the membership card (money balls, savings and prepaid balance) is all zero. I must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the ball of the card A, on the P platform side to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform updates the game ball to 5000, and transmits a response including the game ball to 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, the game is started on the P platform, and when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 with the execution of the game, 1000 balls of game balls are transferred to another person and the ball is shared (1000 When a ball (ball) designation operation is performed, the CU and the P platform are in a state of splitting the holding balls thereafter.

  The card B on which the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to another person is recorded, the stock card stored in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 to make up the card B Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all the game balls (= 4000) at the present time are written and discharged to the card A (member card owned by the player), the game ball = 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to be able to divide the points while sharing a game (shared ball sharing), the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of “held points = 0”, and the game ball corresponding to the score is CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server are searched, The score is updated to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the game balls are subtracted as the game continues in the P units, and the game balls are in a state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of balls to be subtracted = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P units in order to write 1000, which is the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to the card B. In response to this, the P number subtracts 1000 from the current number of game balls 3800 to obtain the number of game balls = 2800, and transmits an operation response including the number of game balls = 2800 to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “Moving Ball = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred (shared ball) to the other person. In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 91). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball = 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected in connection with the sharing of points (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the ball splitting (ball sharing) process ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 ( (See FIG. 92).

  In the inserted card A, when the card is returned after the game is finished, the game ball is written as a holding ball and discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 84 shows a control operation in the case where the player inserts the visitor card B in which 5,000 balls are recorded into the CU and performs split transfer of the ball (shared ball) while playing the game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the card to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The ball is shared and the visitor card B is transferred to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (with balls = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding all the 5000 balls recorded on the inserted card B as game balls. (Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stores the game ball = 5000 and returns an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game is possible with P cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the game balls are used in the game and the game balls are set to 4000, the player designates shared ball sharing (1000 balls) to divide and transfer 1000 game balls to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the game balls are further used for the game and the game balls = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request number of balls = 1000 for subtracting 1000 balls of game balls for split transfer (share ball sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P platform subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800. Then, “Moving Ball = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the process of split transfer of holding balls (share holding) is completed. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the P units and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 45 and is stored in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the data of the holding ball corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is used as the number of game balls received from the CU. In addition to updating to a corresponding value (= 1000 points), it is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (share points shared) and that 1000 points are points generated by share possession. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of game balls at the time of card | curd discharge are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server = 1000 And a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (shared ball sharing). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 83 will be mainly described. The flowchart shown in FIG. 85 is the same as FIG. 83 in that the card A, which is a player's membership card that has already been inserted, is returned first when the game balls are divided and transferred (share ball sharing). There is a game ball (200 collateral balls) necessary to continue the game during splitting, and the remaining game balls are recorded as cards in card A. Is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates the display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate holding ball sharing in which 1000 balls are divided and transferred. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared balls to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral balls described above in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) −collateral ball (200) −shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction request balls = 3800 to the P units. In response to this, the P units subtract 3800 from the current game ball 5000 and calculate and store the remaining game balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200, the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the holding ball = 3800 in the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. In this way, in order to carry out split transfer (share ball sharing) while continuing the game on the P platform, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral ball for play (play: 200 balls) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B of the holding ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in P cars, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 60 are generated. As a result, game balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) −60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  In the CU, an operation request command including the subtraction request number of balls = 1000 is transmitted to the P units in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball sharing).

  In response to this, the P player subtracts the number of subtraction request balls 1000 from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game balls = 150, and transmits a response of the motion response including the game balls = 150 to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “Mochitama = 1000” on the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform split transfer (game ball sharing) of game balls by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who saw it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (mochitama = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, the game ball at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75. When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether or not the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected in association with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. If they match, the CU adds 3800 recorded balls on the card A as a game ball to the P units. In order to do this, an operation request command including the number of balls to be added = 3800 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the P platform calculates a game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits a response of an operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

86 to 103 are screen views displayed on the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, based on FIG. 86 to FIG. 92, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of performing holding ball sharing shown in FIG. 83 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 86, the player selects and designates sharing of the ball from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. The state thus obtained is the display screen for sharing the money shown in FIG. The shared ball sharing (game ball split transfer) can be either split transfer from a player-owned ball or split transfer from a stored ball. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a ball sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a holding ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a storage ball are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 86, the status of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. FIG. 86 shows that a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a holding ball of 0, a savings of 500, and a current game of 10,000 balls.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending a game ball from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payout balls. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “mochidama” or “reserved ball” in the left half of the screen to select and input a ball sharing source. Here, a case where “mochitama” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “mochitama”, the screen shown in FIG. 87 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of balls to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and the number of balls to be shared is 500 balls, 1000 balls, 1500 balls, 2000 balls, 2500 balls, 3000 balls, 3500 balls, Nine types of 4000 balls and 5000 balls are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 balls” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 balls”, then the screen shown in FIG. 88 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 88, a message “Your ball is divided by the above details. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls on your card is 9000 as the details of the number of shared balls. It is displayed that the number of balls of a shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) “start ball sharing” and a display item (icon) “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of the ball is canceled. On the other hand, if “start ball sharing” is selected and input, ball sharing processing as shown in the details of the number of balls to be shared is started.

  If the player selects and inputs “start ball sharing”, the screen shown in FIG. 89 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 89, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. This ball sharing process status image has three types, 1, 2, and 3 as the processing order. In the first process, the player's (player) card is discharged, the shared card is discharged as the second process, and the third process. As reinserted my card is displayed as ejected. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  In the screen on the right half of FIG. 89, 10,000 balls that are game balls in the P units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 90, the “status” column shows that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow.

  When the discharge of the shared card is completed, the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed next. In the screen shown in FIG. 91, the user's card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 92 is then displayed. In FIG. 92, a message “ball sharing is complete” is displayed, and the ball sharing processing status indicates that all of the first processing, the second processing, and the third processing have been completed. Then, since the sharing of 1000 balls has been completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in P units at the present time is 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 balls.

  Next, FIGS. 93 to 99 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 44 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 93, the display screen of FIG. 93 shows a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper part of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets” Four types of menus of “20 items” are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  On the right half screen of FIG. 93, 1000 balls are displayed as the number of game balls at the present time on P cars. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, considering that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 94 is displayed next. In FIG. 94, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of game balls required to order each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu in consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 94, the screen is scrolled up and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 94, after the player selects the coffee menu that requires 75 balls, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Returning to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 93, selecting the “10 food items” menu in FIG. 93 and displaying the food menu item, the “hamburger” that requires 100 game balls is displayed. A menu is selected, and further, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 95 is touched to return to the wagon menu display screen in FIG. The case where the icon of “20 sweets” is selected and input and the player selects “ice” which requires 50 game balls from the display screen of the sweets will be described.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 95 is then displayed, and the details of the ordered product selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 95, it is shown that one hamburger with a consumption of 100 balls, one coffee with a consumption of 75 balls, and one ice with a consumption of 50 balls are ordered. And it is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is 225 balls. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching the third “Delete” The ice order is deleted.

  Furthermore, an “add product” icon is displayed below the order item details. When the player touches this icon, the player returns to the display screen of the wagon menu of FIG. 93 as described above. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  In addition, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 95, and by touching this icon, the player can cancel all the order products that have been ordered so far. .

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 95, the screen shown in FIG. 96 is displayed. FIG. 96 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 95, the screen shown in FIG. 97 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 97, an image being inquired about ordered products is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total number of balls consumed, and 1000 balls currently played on P cars, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 98, an arrow indicating that communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the “225” balls consumed to the “1000” balls of P units. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed from the “1000” balls in the P direction toward the “225” balls to be consumed, and the text “inquiry” is displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen shown in FIG. 99 is displayed. In the screen of FIG. 99, the message “The ordered product has been accepted. The number of consumed balls has been withdrawn from the holding balls.” Is displayed, and the order product received and the order product received are displayed. It is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is “225”. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the game balls in the current P units are “775” balls as a result of the consumption of 225 balls.

  FIGS. 100 and 101 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 41, and are the third display screen from the top of the display screens of the CU side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 100, the left half of the screen shows game table information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side of FIG. 82, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 100, a display is displayed in which all 1000 balls, which are the balls of the card inserted into the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, when the movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 101, and a message “Moving ball movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen. 1000 balls are displayed as game balls in the P platform, and the display of “1000” blinking is made.

  102 and 103 are display screens showing that clear display is being performed in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 102, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current game balls in P cars are 1000 balls, and “1000” is displayed blinking. Then, a state in which the holding ball is moved from the P platform to the holding ball display field is displayed, and a character “moving ball holding” is displayed.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the holding balls is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 103, and the state that the gaming balls on the P platform side are 0 balls is displayed, and 1000 balls are displayed as the holding balls. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  Referring to FIG. 104, various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h for detecting winning balls that are won in various winning ports provided in game area 27 are provided, and only the out balls collected from out port 145 are detected. An out-ball detection switch 701 is provided. The merge path detection switch 32 is provided in the merge passage path 702 where the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the prize balls detected by the various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h merge and pass. Yes.

  Of these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are constituted by proximity switches. By configuring the various detection switches in this way, when a so-called radio wave is generated and an illegal radio wave is transmitted and an illegal act of illegally outputting a winning ball detection signal from various winning ball detection switches occurs, the proximity switch is Although a detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, only the junction path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and therefore does not output any detection signal without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If it is normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches should be the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch. However, when a radio wave that transmits an illegal radio wave occurs, the detection signal from the detection switch constituted by other proximity switches is output without outputting the detection signal from the junction path detection switch 32. The ball detection total by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 do not match. Based on the occurrence of such a mismatch phenomenon, it can be determined that an illegal act has occurred.

  For this purpose, the payout control board 17 receives the detection signals of the various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 701, the detection signal of the foul ball detection switch 33, and the detection signal of the merge path detection switch 32. Then, the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 configured by proximity switches is calculated, and whether the total and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 coincide with each other. Is determined. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As still another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 104 is provided at a position lower than the joining point where the foul balls detected by the foul ball detecting switch 33 join the joining passage path 702, and You may comprise so that the sum of an out ball | bowl and a foul ball | bowl may be detected by the joining path | route detection switch 32. FIG. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As yet another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 104 is left as it is, and is separated from the joining point where the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 joins the joining passage path 702. May be configured such that the total of winning balls, out balls, and foul balls is detected by another merging path detection switch. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control board 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54. In addition, the above-described abnormality determination is performed by determining whether or not the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32. Run in parallel.

  Next, specific control of the game control means mounted on the main control board 16 and the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described. FIG. 105 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the payout control board 17. FIG. 105 also shows the main control board 16, the display effect control board 53, the power supply board 900, and the like. On the payout control board 17, a payout control microcomputer (corresponding to payout control means) 170 for carrying out payout control according to a program is mounted. The payout control microcomputer 170 includes a ROM 172 for storing various payout control programs and the like, a RAM 173 as storage means used as a work memory, a payout control CPU 171 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 174. Including. In this embodiment, the ROM 172 and the RAM 173 are built in the payout control microcomputer 170. That is, the payout control microcomputer 170 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 173, and the ROM 172 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 174 may be externally attached.

  Since the payout control microcomputer 171 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 172 in the payout control microcomputer 170, the payout control microcomputer 170 (or payout control CPU 171) executes (or processing). Specifically, this means that the payout control CPU 171 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the payout control board 17.

  Further, the RAM 173 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source 910 created on the power supply substrate 900. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 173 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply 910 is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In this embodiment, as will be described later, at least a difference value between the number of game balls fired in the game area 27 and the number of game balls collected at any of the winning holes, out holes 145, and foul ball return openings 150. The value of the floating ball counter for counting as the number of floating balls is stored in the backup RAM. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 173 is backed up.

  In this embodiment, the dispensing control microcomputer 170 mounted on the dispensing control board 17 includes a merging path detection switch 32, a foul ball detection switch 33, a glass door closing detector 12, a front frame closing detector 13, a firing. Detection signals are input from the motor origin sensor 37, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 1 (42a), and the gaming ball excess / deficiency detection switch 2 (42b). (See FIG. 4). Further, a control signal from the payout control microcomputer 170 is output to the glass door opening solenoid 10, the front frame opening solenoid 11, the firing control board 31 and the lifting motor 40.

  The payout control microcomputer 170 receives payout control commands from the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and performs various payout controls based on the received payout control commands. Further, the payout control microcomputer 170 transmits the display effect control command to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control microcomputer receives the display control command. Various display controls in the display 54 are performed based on the display effect control command.

  The payout control board 17 is equipped with an external output circuit 175 for outputting a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 2. 1 can output an external signal.

  A game control microcomputer 160 is mounted on the main control board 16. For example, when the game control microcomputer 160 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by executing a lottery process using random numbers, or determines to control the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state is determined to be a jackpot game. Control to shift to the state. In addition, for example, the game control microcomputer 160 may execute a lottery process using random numbers or determine a jackpot type to set a high probability state (probability change state) or a high base state (short time state). When it is determined whether or not it is determined to be a high probability state or a high base state, control is performed to shift the gaming state to the high probability state or the high base state. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 realizes a game state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state.

  Note that the RAM mounted on the main control board 16 or the game control microcomputer 160 is also configured as a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by the backup power source 910 created on the power supply board 900. Has been. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, the main control board 16 or the game control microcomputer 160 is used for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply 910 is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The contents of a part or all of the RAM mounted on the are stored. For example, various game control data such as a process flag indicating the progress status of the game control process and a flag indicating a probability change state or a short time state are stored in the backup RAM.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control board 17 is common regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2 (for example, the same operating according to the same program regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2). Realized by a microcomputer of the type). On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16 differs depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2. As the game control microcomputer 160, a microcomputer of a different type may be used, or the same type of microcomputer may be operated according to a different program.

  In this embodiment, since the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control board 17 is common regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2, for example, it is arranged on the game frame side of the pachinko machine 2. Thus, even if the game board 26 is replaced and the model is changed, it may be reused. Further, it may be arranged on the game board 26 side so that the game board 26 is replaced when the model is changed.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the game control microcomputer 160 when the power to the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 2 and power supply is started, for example, after executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the game control microcomputer 160 (Specifically, the CPU mounted on the game control microcomputer 160) performs control to transmit a model designation command for designating the model of the pachinko machine 2 to the payout control microcomputer 170 (step S1). In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are two types of models of the pachinko machine 2, model A and model B, and a model designation command that can specify whether the model is model A or model B is transmitted. In this case, for example, if the model A, a model designation command with “01” set as EXT data is transmitted, and if the model B, a model designation command with “02” set as EXT data is transmitted. Good.

  Instead of sending a model designation command every time the power to the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, the model is designated only when the power is turned on for the first time after changing the game board 26 and changing the model. A command may be transmitted.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 160 confirms whether or not the backup RAM area data protection processing (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped. (Step S2). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S5. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process (for example, whether the backup flag is set). The

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the game control microcomputer 160 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S3). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S3, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the gaming control microcomputer 160 executes a power failure recovery process for restoring the gaming state to the state when the power supply is stopped based on the data stored in the backup RAM ( Step S4).

  When it is not confirmed in step S2 that the power supply stop process has been performed (specifically, when the backup flag is not set), or when the check result is not normal in step S3. The game control microcomputer 160 executes initialization processing such as RAM clear processing (step S5). Note that some data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM.

  When the process of step S4 or step S5 is executed, the game control microcomputer 160 determines whether to execute a lottery process using a random number to control the jackpot gaming state or to control to the jackpot gaming state. In such a case, the process shifts to a loop for repeatedly executing various game control processes (step S6) such as control for shifting the game state to the big hit game state.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a payout control main process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170 when the power to the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 2 and power supply is started, for example, after executing a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the payout control microcomputer 170 is executed. (Specifically, the payout control CPU 171) checks whether or not a model designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 (step S10A), and if not, receives the model designation command. Wait until. Upon receiving the model designation command, the payout control CPU 171 stores the received model designation command in, for example, the model designation command storage area provided in the RAM 173, and when power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped. In step S10, it is confirmed whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed. If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the process proceeds to step S15. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process (for example, whether the backup flag is set). The

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the payout control CPU 171 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S11). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S11, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the payout control CPU 171 sets the return time threshold value as the abnormality time determination threshold value (step S12).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the payout control CPU 171 uses the floating ball number counter to count the number of game balls fired in the game area 27 and any winning / out port 145, foul ball return port. The difference between the number of game balls collected at 150 and the number of floating balls (the game in a state where the game area 27 is floated after being fired and before being collected at the winning port, the out port 145, and the foul ball return port 150) Count the number of balls). Then, when the value of the floating ball counter reaches the abnormality determination threshold value, the payout control CPU 171 determines that an abnormality such as clogging in the game area 27 has occurred, and performs abnormality control.

  FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. Among these, FIG. 108 (A) shows an abnormality determination threshold value table for model A in which a threshold value for abnormality determination is set when model A is designated as the model of the pachinko machine 2. FIG. 108B shows an abnormality determination threshold value table for model B in which a threshold value for abnormality determination is set when model B is designated as the model of the pachinko machine 2. As shown in FIG. 108, in this embodiment, there are two types of thresholds for determination at the time of abnormality: a first abnormality determination threshold and a second abnormality determination threshold. As will be described later, the payout control CPU 171 performs the first abnormality control when the value of the floating ball number counter reaches the first abnormality determination threshold. Specifically, as the first abnormality control, a predetermined abnormality notification screen (soon to be in a firing stop state) is displayed on the display 54 with respect to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53. Control for displaying a warning screen) and a control for outputting an abnormality signal that can identify the occurrence of abnormality to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175. Further, the payout control CPU 171 performs second abnormality control when the value of the floating ball counter reaches the second abnormality determination threshold. Specifically, as the second abnormality control, a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal is output to the launch control board 31 to control the launch stop state in which the launch of the game ball is stopped, and the display effect control Control for causing the display 54 to display a predetermined firing stop notification screen (notification screen for notifying that a launch stop state has been reached) is performed on the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 53.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 108, in this embodiment, a different abnormality determination threshold value table is selected depending on whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is model A or model B, and the selected abnormality determination is performed. Based on the threshold value table, a threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality is set. That is, in general, in the pachinko machine 2, each collection unit (each prize opening) after the game ball is fired by the ball hitting device, depending on how to make the game area 27 (for example, how to arrange the path of the game ball or the position of the nail). Since there is a difference in the time taken to collect at the outlet 145 and the foul ball return port 150), the likelihood of floating balls varies depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2. For this reason, if the abnormal time control is performed using the same threshold value regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2, there is a possibility that the timing of the abnormal time control may be too early or too late depending on the model. Therefore, in this embodiment, an abnormality determination threshold value table in which different thresholds are set depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2 is selected, and the control at the time of abnormality is performed. It is possible to perform control during abnormal conditions.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (A), when the type of the pachinko machine 2 is the model A, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold value at the normal time when neither the power failure recovery nor the big hit game is in progress. Is set, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, when the power failure is restored, a larger value than the normal time is used as the threshold value for abnormality determination, “25” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold value, and “35” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Is set. Further, even during the big hit game, a value larger than the normal time is used as the threshold value for abnormality determination, “25” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold value, and “35” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), when the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model B, the threshold value for determining the first abnormality is “10” at the normal time when neither the power failure recovery nor the big hit game is in progress. Is set, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, when the power failure is restored, a value larger than the normal time is used as the threshold value for abnormality determination, “15” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold value, and “25” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value. Is set. In addition, during the big hit game, a value larger than the normal time is used as the threshold value for the abnormality determination, “15” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “25” as the second abnormality determination threshold. Is set.

  The abnormality determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 is stored, for example, in a predetermined abnormality determination threshold value table storage area of the RAM 173, and an initialization process (see step S16) described later when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on. ) Is not initialized even if executed.

  In step S12, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108A is selected, and the abnormality time determination threshold value table is selected based on the selected model A abnormality time determination threshold table. Is set as the first abnormality time determination threshold value, and “35” is set as the second abnormality time determination threshold value. In the case of the model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the abnormality time determination threshold table is selected based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. A return threshold is set as the first threshold, “15” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “25” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on the fact that the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 115). ). When the abnormality determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 in step S12, based on the updated model A abnormality determination threshold table or model B abnormality determination threshold table. Thus, the return threshold value is set as the abnormality determination threshold value.

  Next, the RAM 173, which is the backup RAM, should have been backed up with the value of the floating ball counter before the power was turned off. The number of floating balls is stored in a predetermined floating ball number storage area provided in the RAM 173 (step S13). Next, the payout control CPU 171 sets a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) in the measurement timer after power failure recovery for measuring the elapsed time after power failure recovery (step S14).

  If it is not confirmed in step S10 that the power supply stop process has been performed (specifically, if the backup flag is not set) or if the check result is not normal in step S11 The payout control CPU 171 sets a normal time threshold value as a threshold value for abnormality determination (step S15). In this case, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108A is selected, and the abnormality time determination threshold value table is selected based on the selected model A abnormality time determination threshold table. The normal threshold is set, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. In the case of the model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the abnormality time determination threshold table is selected based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. The normal threshold value is set as the threshold value, “10” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold value, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold value.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on the fact that the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 115). ). When the abnormality determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 in step S15, based on the updated model A abnormality time determination threshold table and model B abnormality time determination threshold table. The normal time threshold is set as the abnormality determination threshold.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 executes initialization processing such as RAM clear processing (step S16). Various data such as the value of the floating ball number counter is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process. It may be initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. Further, a part of the data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 173. In this embodiment, the abnormality determination threshold table storage area in which the abnormality determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108 is stored in the storage area of the RAM 173 is not initialized.

  When the processing of step S14 or step S16 is executed, the payout control CPU 171 decreases the number of game balls according to the launch of the game balls, or increases the number of game balls according to the winning at any winning opening. The process proceeds to a loop that repeatedly executes various payout control processes (step S17). The various payout control processes in step S17 include an abnormal time determination process, an abnormal time determination threshold change process, an abnormal time control release process, a launch / lift control command output process, an error process, and an abnormal time determination. Threshold value table update processing is also included.

  109 and 110 are flowcharts showing an example of the abnormality determination process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. FIG. In the abnormality determination process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first sets the value of the abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer for measuring the abnormal time control prohibition period to zero. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S200). The abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer will be described later. If the value of the abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts 1 from the value of the abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer (step S201). If the value of the abnormal-time control prohibition period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 ends the process as it is.

  If the value of the abnormal-time control prohibition period measurement timer is 0 in step S200 or step S202, the payout control CPU 171 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the uplift switch (upper) 41a is input ( Step S203). If the detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one game ball has been fired, and adds 1 to the value of the floating ball number counter (step S204). However, the value of the floating ball counter after the addition exceeds the number of game balls (50 in this example) due to reasons such as misrecognizing the number of floating balls or after power failure recovery. In this case, the payout control CPU 171 does not add the value of the floating ball counter.

  In this embodiment, the case where it is determined that one game ball is fired based on the detection of the game ball by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sensor or switch may be provided at a location closer to the hitting ball launch position, and it may be determined that one game ball has been fired based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor or switch.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, it is not detected that the game ball is actually fired by the hitting ball launching device, but the game ball is placed in the launchable area based on the detection of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. As a result, it is assumed that one game ball has been fired (that is, the game ball has not been fired just by being led to the launchable area). Although the case where 1 is added is shown, the value of the floating ball number counter may be added by 1 by the actual launch of the game ball. In this case, for example, a sensor is provided at the launch port of the hitting ball launcher, and the value of the floating ball counter is set to 1 based on the fact that the game ball launched by the hitting ball launcher is detected by the sensor provided at the launch port. What is necessary is just to add.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball guided to the launchable area is directly detected and the floating ball number counter is incremented by 1 is shown. Instead of detecting the game ball itself, it may be determined that the game ball has been fired by another method and the floating ball number counter is incremented by one. For example, a sensor capable of detecting the operation state of the ball hitting device is provided, and based on the fact that the ball hitting device has been operated once, it is determined that one game ball has been shot and the floating ball is shot. The number counter may be incremented by one.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 has been inputted (step S205). If the detection signal from the merging path detection switch 32 is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one game ball has been collected from any of the winning or out ports 145 and determines the value of the floating ball number counter. 1 is subtracted (step S206). However, if the value of the floating ball counter after subtraction is less than 0 due to misrecognizing the number of floating balls or after recovery from a power failure, the payout control CPU 171 determines the floating ball number counter. Do not subtract the value of.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not a detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33 has been input (step S207). If the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33 is input, the payout control CPU 171 determines that one game ball has been collected from the foul ball return port 150 and subtracts 1 from the value of the floating ball counter ( Step S208). However, if the value of the floating ball counter after subtraction is less than 0 due to misrecognizing the number of floating balls or after recovery from a power failure, the payout control CPU 171 determines the floating ball number counter. Do not subtract the value of.

  In this embodiment, after the game balls actually pass through the winning holes, the out holes 145, and the foul ball return openings 150, based on the detection signal input from the merge path detection switch 32 and the foul ball detection switch 33. Although the case where the value of the floating ball counter is decremented by 1 is shown, the floating ball is not necessarily detected after it has been detected that the game ball has actually passed through each winning hole, out hole 145, or foul ball return opening 150. There is no need to subtract 1 from the value of the number counter. For example, a sensor is provided in each winning opening in the game area 27, the outlet 145, a path just before being led to the foul ball return opening 150, etc., and each game ball is detected based on an input signal of a detection signal from these sensors. It is considered that it has passed the winning opening, out opening 145, and foul ball return opening 150 (that is, it has been guided to an area where each winning opening, out opening 145, and foul ball returning opening 150 are surely passed. 1 may be subtracted from the value of the floating ball counter (which has not yet passed through each winning port, out port 145, or foul ball return port 150).

  In this embodiment, a game ball that has passed through each winning hole, out port 145, and foul ball return port 150 is directly detected and the floating ball counter is decremented by 1. However, the game ball has passed. If it is a method that can detect the game ball itself, it is determined that the game ball has passed through each winning opening, the out port 145, and the foul ball return port 150 by another method instead of detecting the game ball itself. 1 may be subtracted. For example, action plates that operate in accordance with the passage of game balls are provided at each winning opening, out opening 145, and foul ball return opening 150 (for example, game balls that have passed through each winning opening, out opening 145, and foul ball return opening 150). And the operation plate operates), based on the fact that the operation plate has been detected by the sensor, one game ball has passed through each winning opening, out port 145, and foul ball return port 150. Judgment may be made to subtract 1 from the floating ball counter.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not a first abnormal control flag indicating that the first abnormal control is being executed is set (step S209). If the first abnormal control flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the value of the floating ball counter is equal to or greater than the first abnormal determination threshold (step S210). If it is equal to or greater than the first abnormality determination threshold value, the payout control CPU 171 displays an abnormality notification start designation command for designating the start of abnormality notification (warning notification for warning that the launch will be stopped soon). Control to transmit to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the device effect control board 53 is performed (step S211). The display effect control microcomputer displays a predetermined abnormality notification screen (warning screen for warning that a launch will be stopped soon) on the display 54 based on the received abnormality notification start designation command. Control to start abnormality notification is performed. In step S211, for example, the payout control CPU 171 sets the current number of floating balls (specifically, the value of the floating ball number counter) in the EXT data and transmits an abnormality notification start designation command. The display effect control microcomputer performs control to display on the display 54 an abnormality notification screen including the number of floating balls specified by the received abnormality notification start designation command.

  Also, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to output an abnormal signal to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175 (step S212). Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a first abnormal control flag (step S213). Further, the payout control CPU 171 adds 1 to the abnormal control count counter for counting the number of times of execution of the abnormal control (step S213A).

  If the first abnormal control flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the second abnormal control flag indicating that the second abnormal control is being executed is set. (Step S214). If the second abnormal control flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or greater than the second abnormal determination threshold (step S215). If it is equal to or greater than the second abnormality determination threshold value, the payout control CPU 171 sets a firing stop flag indicating the stop of the game ball firing in order to control the firing stop state (step S216).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S216A). Whether or not a big hit game is in progress is specifically determined by confirming whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 4) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can. If it is during a big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 displays a big hit hourly stop notification designation command for designating the start of the firing stop notice for notifying that the fire has been stopped during the big hit game. Control is performed to transmit to the display effect control microcomputer installed in 53 (step S216B). The display effect control microcomputer terminates the abnormality notification based on the received jackpot launch stop notification designation command and displays a predetermined jackpot launch stop notification screen (during the jackpot game). A notification screen for notifying that the firing has been stopped is displayed and control for starting the firing stop notification is performed. On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 designates the start of the fire stop notice for notifying that the fire has been stopped in the normal game state other than during the big hit game. Control is performed to transmit the command to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 (step S216C). The display-use production control microcomputer terminates the abnormality notification based on the received normal-time launch stop notification designation command and displays a predetermined normal-time launch stop notification screen (in the normal gaming state). A notification screen for notifying that the firing has been stopped is displayed and control for starting the firing stop notification is performed. In steps S216B and S216C, for example, the payout control CPU 171 sets the current number of floating balls (specifically, the value of the floating ball number counter) as EXT data and transmits a firing stop notification start designation command. . The display effect control microcomputer performs control to display on the display 54 a firing stop notification screen including the number of floating balls specified by the received launch stop notification start designation command. Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a second abnormal control flag (step S217).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormality determination threshold value changing process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormality determination threshold value changing process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first checks whether or not the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0 (step S30). ). If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts 1 from the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery (step S31). If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery after subtraction is not 0, the payout control CPU 171 ends the process as it is.

  If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery after subtraction in step S32 is 0 (that is, when a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) elapses after power failure recovery), the payout control CPU 171 is in an abnormal state. The threshold value for determination is changed to the normal time threshold value (step S33). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 (A) is selected, and based on the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table, the first abnormality time determination value is selected. “20” is set as the threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the first abnormality time is determined based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. “10” is set as the determination threshold, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on the fact that the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 115). ). When the abnormality determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 in step S33, based on the updated model A abnormality determination threshold value table or model B abnormality determination threshold value table. The normal time threshold is set as the abnormality determination threshold.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts the value of the return floating ball number stored in the return floating ball number storage area in step S13 from the current floating ball number counter value (step S34). However, when the value of the floating ball counter after subtraction is less than 0, the payout control CPU 171 sets the value of the floating ball counter to 0.

  If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0 in step S30, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the big hit game is being played (step S35). Whether or not a big hit game is in progress is specifically determined by confirming whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 4) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can.

  If it is during the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the big hit middle threshold value as the threshold value for the abnormality determination (step S36). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 (A) is selected, and based on the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table, the first abnormality time determination value is selected. “25” is set as the threshold, and “35” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the first abnormality time is determined based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. “15” is set as the determination threshold, and “25” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. The payout control CPU 171 executes step S36 only when the normal gaming state that is not the big hit gaming state first shifts to the big hit gaming state, and changes the threshold for abnormality determination from the normal threshold to the big hit middle threshold. Change to.

  If it is not during the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold value as the abnormal time determination threshold value (step S37). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 (A) is selected, and based on the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table, the first abnormality time determination value is selected. “20” is set as the threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the first abnormality time is determined based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. “10” is set as the determination threshold, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Note that the payout control CPU 171 executes step S37 only when the big hit gaming state first shifts to the normal gaming state, so that the abnormality determination threshold value is changed from the big hit middle threshold value to the normal time threshold value. do it.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on the fact that the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 115). ). If the abnormality determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 uses the updated model A abnormality determination threshold value table or model B abnormality determination threshold value table in steps S36 and S37. Basically, the big hit middle threshold or the normal time threshold is set as the threshold for abnormality determination.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormal control release process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormal control release processing, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first confirms whether or not the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is in an ON state ( Step S400A). If the glass door closing detector 12 is in an on state (that is, if the glass door 6 is in a closed state), the payout control CPU 171 is in the process of opening the glass door that is set when the open state of the glass door 6 is detected. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S400B). If the glass door open flag is set (that is, if the glass door 6 is closed again after being opened), the glass door open flag is reset (step S400C), and the process proceeds to step S401. . On the other hand, if the glass door opening flag is not set in step S400B, the process ends.

  If the glass door closing detector 12 is not in the on state in step S400A (that is, if the open state of the glass door 6 is detected), the payout control CPU 171 counts the number of game balls enclosed in the pachinko machine 2. Control is performed to transmit an enclosed ball number display designation command designating display of (encapsulated ball number) to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 (step S400D). The payout control CPU 171 may transmit, for example, an enclosed ball number display designation command that designates the number of enclosed balls (50 in this example) ascertained by the pachinko machine 2 using EXT data. Then, the display effect control microcomputer performs control for displaying the number of encapsulated balls (50 in this example) on the display screen of the display 54 based on the received encapsulated ball number display designation command.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the glass door opening flag indicating that the glass door 6 is open is set (step S400E). If the glass door open flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 sets the glass door open flag (step S400F) and ends the process.

  In step S401, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the first abnormal control flag or the second abnormal control flag is set (step S401). If the first abnormal control flag or the second abnormal control flag is set (that is, at least the first abnormal control flag is set and the first abnormal control is executed, or the second abnormal control is performed) When the time control flag is set and the second abnormality control is also executed), the payout control CPU 171 resets the first abnormality control flag and the second abnormality control flag (step S402).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to transmit an abnormality notification end designation command for designating the end of abnormality notification or firing stop notification to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 ( Step S403). The display effect control microcomputer performs control to delete the predetermined abnormality notification screen from the display 54 and end the abnormality notification if abnormality notification is in progress based on the received abnormality notification end designation command. If the firing stop notification is being performed, a control for ending the firing stop notification by deleting the predetermined launch stop notification screen from the display unit 54 is performed. Also, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to output an abnormality release signal to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175 (step S404). Further, if the payout control CPU 171 is set (that is, if the second abnormality control is also being executed and the firing stop flag is set), the firing stop flag is reset (step S405).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not a big hit game is being played (step S406A). Whether or not a big hit game is in progress is specifically determined by confirming whether or not the big hit information (see FIG. 4) has been received from the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. it can. If it is during the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the big hit middle threshold as the threshold for determination at the time of abnormality (step S406B). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 (A) is selected, and based on the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table, the first abnormality time determination value is selected. “25” is set as the threshold, and “35” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the first abnormality time is determined based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. “15” is set as the determination threshold, and “25” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit game, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold value as the abnormal time determination threshold value (step S406C). Specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108 (A) is selected, and based on the model A abnormality time determination threshold value table, the first abnormality time determination value is selected. “20” is set as the threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Further, in the case of model B, the model B abnormality time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108B is selected, and the first abnormality time is determined based on the selected model B abnormality time determination threshold table. “10” is set as the determination threshold, and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated based on the fact that the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (see FIG. 115). ). If the abnormality determination threshold value table has been updated, the payout control CPU 171 uses the updated model A abnormality determination threshold value table or model B abnormal determination threshold value table in steps S406B and S406C. Basically, the big hit middle threshold or the normal time threshold is set as the threshold for abnormality determination.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0 (step S407). If the value of the measurement timer after the power failure recovery is not 0 (that is, in the rare case, when the abnormal time control is still being performed during the power failure recovery), the payout control CPU 171 The measurement timer after power failure recovery is cleared (step S408), and the value of the floating ball number at return stored in the return floating ball storage area at step S13 is subtracted from the current floating ball counter value (step S13). Step S409). However, when the value of the floating ball counter after subtraction is less than 0, the payout control CPU 171 sets the value of the floating ball counter to 0.

  By executing the processing of steps S400A to S409, after the abnormal time control is started, the glass door 6 is opened and then further closed (that is, the glass door 6 is opened, and the game store clerk etc. Based on the fact that the glass door 6 is closed again after the clogging operation is performed, the control at the time of abnormality is canceled. In addition, if the big hit game is being released when the abnormal time control is released, the big hit middle threshold is set as the threshold for judging the abnormal time. A time threshold is set.

  Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) to the abnormal time control prohibition period measurement timer (step S410). It should be noted that, by executing the processing of steps S200 to S202 in the abnormality determination processing based on the abnormality control prohibition period measurement timer set in step S410, a predetermined time (this example) In this case, the control is performed so that the abnormality control is not performed until 10 seconds). That is, since it takes a certain amount of time for the game balls to return to the launch path after releasing the clogged balls generated in the game area 27, the abnormal control is immediately performed after canceling the abnormal control. If it is configured to be executable, inconveniences such as immediately starting the abnormal control even after canceling the abnormal control are likely to occur, so until a predetermined time elapses after the abnormal control is canceled Such a problem is prevented from occurring by prohibiting the abnormal control.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of control command output processing for launching and lifting performed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the control command output process for launching and lifting, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first checks whether or not the game prohibition flag is set (ON) (step). S50). The game prohibition flag is turned on when an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU is received, and turned off when a game permission request is received. If the game prohibition flag is not set in step S50, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the firing stop flag is set (step S51). If the firing stop flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 executes a process of outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 31 (step S52). Upon receipt of this, when the touch ring signal is input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 drives and controls the hitting motor 18 to hit the hit ball.

  Next, a signal from a launch motor origin sensor is input as the hitting ball launch motor 18 is driven. If there is an input of a signal from the firing motor origin sensor 37 (Y in step S53), the payout control CPU 171 executes control for driving the lifting motor 40 (step S54).

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag or the firing stop flag is set (Y in Step S50 or Step S51), the payout control CPU 171 outputs a firing control signal including the firing prohibition signal to the launch control board 31. The process which performs is performed (step S55). Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 stops driving the hit ball launch motor 18 and puts it into a shot stop state where no hit ball is fired.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of error processing executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the error process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first checks whether or not the game prohibition flag is set (ON) (step S60). If the game prohibition flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the firing stop flag is set (step S61). If the game prohibition flag or the firing stop flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input (step S62). If a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. In step S62, the payout control CPU 171 determines whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, the payout control CPU 171 receives the operation instruction including the prohibition request from the CU, and then the above-described operation is performed. When the winning ball detection signal is input after the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) elapses, it is determined that the winning detection signal is input.

  At this time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the winning ball detection signal has been input nevertheless means that a so-called radio wave attack that illegally generates a winning due to an illegal radio wave. There is a risk. In this case, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to output an error notification signal corresponding to the type of error (step S63).

  On the other hand, if neither the game prohibition flag nor the firing stop flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the firing motor origin sensor signal has been input (step S64). When the firing motor origin sensor signal is not input (that is, when the firing motor 18 is not driven), the lifting motor 40 should also be stopped (see S53 and S54). Nevertheless, when a detection signal is input from the head-up detection switch (upper) 41a or the head-up detection switch (lower) 41b (Y in step S65), the payout control CPU 171 determines the type of error. The control which outputs the corresponding error alerting signal is performed (step S63).

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is a signal for performing an abnormality display by the display 54, a point of an abnormality notification lamp (or blinking), or an abnormality notification by sound from a speaker. The control board 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality determined to be Y in step S65, an abnormality display such as “the lifting device has operated abnormally” on the display 54, a point of a lifting device abnormality notification lamp, etc. (or blinking) or The payout control microcomputer 170 outputs a signal for performing an abnormality notification from the speaker, such as “the lifting device has malfunctioned”.

  When the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when a ball is not being fired, an error notification is given when the lifting of the game ball is detected by the ball-up detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball-up detection switch (lower) 41b. The reason is that there is a possibility that a clogged ball will occur in the aisle if a game ball is lifted and supplied even though it is not hit, and a failure may occur. This is so that it can be dealt with.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormality determination threshold value table update process executed by the payout control microcomputer 170. In the abnormality determination threshold value table update process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first has a value of the abnormal time control number counter equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). It is confirmed whether it is (step S70). If the value of the abnormal control number counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the payout control CPU 171 clears the abnormal control number counter (step S71).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 adds a predetermined value to each threshold value set in the abnormal time determination threshold value table stored in the predetermined abnormal time determination threshold value table storage area of the RAM 173, so that an abnormal time determination threshold value is obtained. The table is updated (step S72). In this embodiment, for example, the value “2” as a predetermined value is added to each threshold value, and the threshold value table for abnormality determination is updated. The predetermined value added to each threshold is not limited to “2”. For example, a value “1” may be added to each threshold as a predetermined value, or a value “3” or more may be added to each threshold. Also good.

  In this embodiment, for example, when the threshold value is updated first, the normal time threshold values (“20” and “30” are set in the model A abnormal time determination threshold value table shown in FIG. 108A). ”) To (“ 22 ”and“ 32 ”), the power failure recovery threshold is updated from (“ 25 ”and“ 35 ”) to (“ 27 ”and“ 37 ”), and the big hit middle threshold is ("25" and "35") to ("27" and "37"). Further, in the model B abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. 108 (B), the normal time threshold value is updated from (“10” and “20”) to (“12” and “22”), and the power failure is restored. The hourly threshold is updated from (“15” and “25”) to (“17” and “27”), and the big hit middle threshold is changed from (“15” and “25”) to (“17” and “27”) ) Is updated.

  In addition, after the value of the abnormal time control number counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) and the threshold value table for abnormal time determination is updated, the value of the abnormal time control number counter again becomes the predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) In the case of the above, the process of step S72 is similarly performed, and a predetermined value (“2” in this example) is added to each threshold set in the abnormality determination threshold value table to determine the abnormality determination. The threshold table for use is updated. As described above, in this embodiment, the abnormality control is frequently performed by repeatedly executing the abnormality determination threshold table every time the abnormality control is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Can be corrected. However, it is preferable that an upper limit is set for the number of times that the abnormality determination threshold value table can be updated, instead of allowing the abnormality determination threshold value table to be updated indefinitely. For example, the maximum number of times that the abnormality determination threshold value table can be updated is 5 times, and the value of the abnormality control number counter is set to a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) after the fifth abnormality determination threshold value table is updated. ) Even in the above case, the abnormality determination threshold value table may not be updated.

  In this embodiment, the value of the abnormal control number counter is incremented by one each time the first abnormal control is executed in the abnormal control (see step S213A), and the value of the abnormal control number counter is incremented. Although the case where the threshold value table for abnormality determination is updated when the number of times exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) (that is, when the first abnormality time control is executed a predetermined number of times or more) is shown, The abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated when the second abnormality control is performed a predetermined number of times or more. In this case, for example, in the abnormality determination process, instead of the process of step S213A, the value of the abnormality control number counter is incremented by 1 each time the second abnormality control process of steps S216 to S217 is executed. The processing similar to steps S70 to S72 is executed, and the abnormality determination threshold value table may be updated every time the value of the abnormality control number counter becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 resets the abnormality determination threshold currently used for the abnormality determination based on the updated abnormality determination threshold table (step S73).

  For example, specifically, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, the updated model A abnormality determination threshold value table is selected, and the threshold is updated first based on the selected updated model A abnormality determination threshold table. If the normal time threshold is set as the abnormal time determination threshold, the first abnormal time determination threshold and the second abnormal time determination threshold are changed from (“20” and “30”) to ( "22" and "32") are reset, and if the threshold for power failure recovery is set, it is reset from ("25" and "35") to ("27" and "37"). If the threshold for use is set, it is reset from (“25” and “35”) to (“27” and “37”). In the case of model B, the updated model B abnormality determination threshold value table is selected, and the threshold is first updated based on the selected updated model B abnormality determination threshold table. If the normal time threshold is set as the abnormal time determination threshold, the first abnormal time determination threshold and the second abnormal time determination threshold are set to (“10” and “20”). From (“12” and “22”), and if the power failure recovery threshold is set, reset from “(15” and “25”) to (“17” and “27”), If the big hit middle threshold is set, it is reset from (“15” and “25”) to (“17” and “27”).

  Next, the payout control CPU 171 outputs a threshold update signal indicating that the abnormality determination threshold value table and the abnormality determination threshold value have been updated to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175. (Step S74). In step S74, the payout control CPU 171 also sends, for example, a signal that can specify whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is model A or model B to the hall management computer 1 via the external output circuit 175. Output. Further, for example, when the threshold update signal is composed of a plurality of bits, information that can specify whether the model is A or B is set in a predetermined bit of the threshold update signal to set the hall management computer 1. May be output.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating an example of signal transmission / reception processing executed by the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 executes the signal transmission / reception processing of FIG. 116 for transmitting / receiving various signals to / from each pachinko machine in the amusement store at predetermined time intervals. In the signal transmission / reception process, the hall management computer 1 confirms whether or not a signal is received from any pachinko machine in the amusement store (step S80). If it has been received, the hall management computer 1 checks whether or not the received signal is a threshold update signal (step S81).

  If the threshold update signal is received, the hall management computer 1 identifies the model of the pachinko machine that has transmitted the threshold update signal (step S82). For example, when the pachinko machine is configured to output a signal that can specify the pachinko machine model together with the threshold update signal, it is determined whether the pachinko machine model is the model A or the model B based on the signal. Identify. Also, for example, when information that can specify the model is set in a predetermined bit of the threshold update signal, it is specified whether the model of the pachinko machine is model A or model B based on the threshold update signal. .

  Then, the hall management computer 1 sets the threshold value for abnormality determination for all the pachinko machines of the model specified in step S82 in the amusement store (specifically, the payout control microcomputer provided in the pachinko machine). A threshold update instruction signal for instructing update is output (step S83). Thereafter, each pachinko machine that has received the threshold update instruction signal (specifically, the payout control microcomputer provided in the pachinko machine) performs a process of updating the threshold for abnormality determination based on the received threshold update instruction signal. Do. For example, each pachinko machine executes processing similar to steps S72 and S73 of the abnormality determination threshold value table update process to update the abnormality determination threshold value table, and at the time of abnormality currently used for abnormality determination. Reset the threshold for determination.

  On the other hand, if the signal received in step S81 is not the threshold update signal, the hall management computer 1 executes processing according to the received signal (step S84). For example, if an abnormality signal is received, the hall management computer 1 performs processing such as displaying an abnormality notification screen for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, and notifies the game store clerk of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Next, the abnormality notification screen and the firing stop notification screen displayed on the display unit 54 by the control at the time of abnormality will be described. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of an abnormality notification screen and a firing stop notification screen. FIG. 117 (a) shows a specific example of the abnormality notification screen displayed in the first abnormality control. As already described, if the value of the floating ball counter is equal to or greater than the first abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 uses the abnormality notification start designation command for the display on which the display effect control board 53 is mounted. Control to transmit to the production control microcomputer is performed (see step S211). Then, the display effect control control microcomputer performs control to display the abnormality notification screen as shown in FIG. 117 (a) on the display 54 and start the abnormality notification based on the received abnormality notification start designation command. . In the example shown in FIG. 117 (a), an abnormality notification screen including a character string “Warning !! The number of game balls is abnormal” is displayed to warn that a launch stop state will be warned soon. Yes. In the example shown in FIG. 117 (a), an abnormality notification screen including the character string “the number of floating balls is 24” is displayed based on the number of floating balls specified by the received abnormality notification start designation command. It is shown.

  117 (b) and 117 (c) show specific examples of the launch stop notification screen displayed in the second abnormality control. Among these, FIG. 117 (b) shows a specific example of the firing stop notification screen displayed in the second abnormal control during the big hit game, and FIG. 117 (c) shows the first in the normal game state other than during the big hit game. 2 shows a specific example of a firing stop notification screen displayed in the control at the time of abnormality.

  As already explained, if the value of the floating ball number counter is equal to or greater than the second abnormality determination threshold, the payout control CPU 171 uses a big hit firing stop notification designation command for the display if the big hit game is being played. Control to transmit to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 53 is performed (see step S216B). Then, the display effect control microcomputer displays a big hit mid-shot launch stop notification screen as shown in FIG. 117B on the display 54 based on the received big hit launch stop notification designation command. Control to start stop notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 117 (b), a launch stop notification screen including a display of “hit a big hit” is displayed together with a character string “playing of a game ball has been stopped.” The case of notifying that it has become is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 117 (b), the launch stop notification screen including the character string “the number of floats is 36” is displayed based on the number of suspended balls specified by the received jackpot launch stop notification designation command. The display case is shown.

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 performs control to transmit a normal launch stop notification designation command to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the display effect control board 53 if the big hit game is not being performed (step S216C). reference). Then, the display-use effect control microcomputer displays a normal-time launch stop notification screen as shown in FIG. 117 (c) on the display 54 based on the received normal-time launch stop notification designation command. Control to start stop notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 117 (c), a launch stop notification screen including the character string “A game ball has been stopped” (not including “Big hit” is displayed) is displayed. A case is shown in which it is informed that the shooting is stopped in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 117 (c), based on the number of floating balls specified by the received normal-time launch stop notification designation command, a launch stop notification screen including a character string “the number of floating balls is 32” is displayed. The display case is shown.

  Next, a specific example of displaying the number of encapsulated balls on the display 54 when the opening of the glass door 6 is detected will be described. FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display screen that displays the number of encapsulated balls. As described above, when it is detected that the glass door closing detector 12 is not in the on state and the glass door 6 is in the open state, the payout control CPU 171 displays an enclosed ball number display designation command. Control to transmit to the display effect control microcomputer mounted on the device effect control board 53 is performed (see step S400D). Then, the display effect presentation control microcomputer displays a display screen of the number of encapsulated balls as shown in FIG. 118 on the display 54 based on the received encapsulated ball number display designation command. In the example shown in FIG. 118, a display screen including a character string “Glass door is open” and a display of the number of encapsulated balls (in this example, 50) is displayed, and the glass door 6 is in an open state. It is shown that the number of encapsulated balls is displayed while notifying that

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a predetermined number (50 in this example) of game balls used in one pachinko machine 2 are within a predetermined enclosing region (in this example, pachinko machine 2). In the pachinko machine 2 enclosed in the inner), first detection means (in this example, a ball raising switch (upper) 41a) for detecting the launch of a game ball to the game area 27, and a recovery unit (in this example, Second detection means (in this example, a merging path detection switch 32 and a foul ball detection switch 33) for detecting the passing of game balls through each winning port, out port 145, and foul ball return port 150) are provided. Further, the payout control microcomputer 170 recognizes the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls passed through the collection unit based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference number has reached a threshold value for abnormality determination, and abnormality control is executed based on the determination that the threshold value for abnormality determination has been reached. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, the abnormality control can be performed automatically, thereby enabling early detection of the occurrence of the abnormality.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 160 outputs a model designation command capable of specifying the model of the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control microcomputer 170 is output by the game control microcomputer 160. The threshold for abnormality determination is changed according to the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the specified model designation command (in this example, the model A abnormality shown in FIG. A threshold value for abnormality determination is set using the time determination threshold value table. When the model B is model B, the threshold value for abnormality determination is determined using the model B abnormality time determination threshold table shown in FIG. Set). Therefore, since the threshold value for abnormality determination is changed according to the model of the pachinko machine 2, the frequency of execution of abnormal control can be adjusted according to the model of the pachinko machine 2, and according to the model of the pachinko machine 2. It is possible to appropriately perform control at the time of abnormality.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormality is determined based on the determination that the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls that have passed through the collection unit has reached the first abnormality determination threshold. The abnormality notification is executed as the time control, and based on the determination that the second abnormality determination threshold value exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold value is reached, the game ball 27 is discharged to the game area 27 as the abnormality control. Control to stop firing. Then, at least one of the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold is changed to a different value according to at least the model of the pachinko machine 2 or the gaming state (in this example, the model A In the case of model A, the threshold value for abnormality determination is set using the model A abnormality threshold determination table shown in FIG. 108 (A). In the case of model B, the abnormality for model B shown in FIG. 108 (B) is set. 108 is set using the hour determination threshold table, and if the big hit game is being played, the big hit middle threshold shown in Fig. 108 is set, otherwise the normal time threshold shown in Fig. 108 is set. Set). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the execution frequency of the abnormal control according to the model and gaming state of the pachinko machine. The play of the game ball can be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the case where both the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold are changed to different values according to both the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the gaming state is shown. However, the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed to different values according to either the model of the pachinko machine 2 or the gaming state, or the first abnormality Only one of the time determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed to a different value.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 counts the number of executions of the abnormal time control, and the number of executions of the abnormal time control reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). Based on the determination, the threshold value for abnormality determination is changed (in this example, the abnormality determination threshold table is updated and the abnormality determination threshold value currently used for abnormality determination is reset). . For this reason, it is possible to detect a state in which abnormal control is being performed more than necessary, and to set an appropriate threshold for abnormal determination, and to correct a state in which abnormal control occurs more frequently than necessary. Can do.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 outputs a threshold update signal indicating that the abnormality determination threshold has been updated to the hall management computer 1. Then, the hall management computer 1 sends a threshold update instruction signal for instructing the payout control microcomputer provided in the pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine that has received the threshold update signal to update the threshold value for abnormality determination. Output. Therefore, the update of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality can be reflected to other pachinko machines of the same model, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of abnormality from occurring more frequently than necessary between pachinko machines of the same model.

  In this embodiment, based on the fact that the cumulative number of times of abnormal time control has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), it is determined that abnormal time control has occurred more frequently than necessary. However, the method for determining whether or not the abnormal-time control occurs more frequently than necessary is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of simply counting the cumulative number of times, a timer is used to measure a predetermined measurement period of occurrence frequency of the abnormality control, and the abnormality control is performed during the predetermined measurement period (for example, 5 minutes). Based on the occurrence of the predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more, it may be determined that the control at the time of abnormality occurs more frequently than necessary, and the threshold for determination at the time of abnormality may be changed.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when abnormality control is being executed, a specific abnormality display based on the difference between the number of game balls launched into the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit. (The floating ball number display shown in FIG. 117) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp the difference between the number of game balls that the game store clerk launches in the game area 27 and the number of game balls that pass through the collection unit by a specific abnormal time display (floating ball number display).

  In this embodiment, the case where the difference number (floating ball number) between the number of game balls launched into the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit is displayed is shown. As an example, the remaining number of fireable balls calculated from the number of floating balls may be displayed.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality is changed according to the gaming state (in this example, when a big hit game is being played, a big hit middle threshold value (in the case of model A, “ 25 ”and“ 35 ”, and in the case of model B,“ 15 ”and“ 25 ”). Therefore, since the threshold for abnormality determination is changed according to the gaming state, the execution frequency of the abnormality control can be appropriately adjusted according to the gaming state, and the abnormality control can be appropriately performed according to the gaming state. Can be.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the abnormal time control (in this example, the second abnormal time control) is executed to control the firing stop state, the advantageous game state (in this example, the big hit game state) is entered. In the case of being controlled, the firing stop state is controlled at a later timing than in the case of being controlled to the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied by preventing the launch of the game ball to the game area during the advantageous gaming state more than necessary. .

  In this embodiment, more specifically, as a threshold for abnormality determination, a big hit / medium threshold larger than the normal threshold (“25” and “35” in the case of model A, and in the case of model B). By changing to “15” and “25”), it is possible to lengthen the period until the game ball is stopped when an abnormality is detected during the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the game ball cannot be launched in the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the big hit / medium thresholds (“25” and “35” in the case of the model A, “15” and “25” in the case of the model B) that are larger than the normal time thresholds) are changed. Thus, when an abnormality is detected during the big hit game, it shows a case where the period until the game ball is stopped to be released is increased, but the method of increasing the period until the game ball is stopped to be released is The present invention is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, even during a big hit game, the threshold for abnormality determination is set to the same value as normal, and after actually detecting that the value of the floating ball counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold, the actual launch is stopped. By providing a delay time until the state is set, it is possible to lengthen the period until the game ball is stopped when an abnormality is detected during the big hit game. In this case, for example, in normal times, when it is detected that the value of the floating ball counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold, the control is immediately stopped, while the value of the floating ball counter is in the big hit game. After detecting that the second threshold value for abnormal determination has been reached, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) may be waited before controlling to the firing stop state. In addition, for example, if the game is a big hit game, after detecting that the value of the floating ball counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold, the floating ball counter again after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. When the value of the floating ball counter still reaches the second abnormality determination threshold, the firing stop state may be controlled. Also, for example, when it is detected that the value of the floating ball counter has reached the second abnormality determination threshold, if it is just before the big hit end (for example, the final round during the big hit), the big hit game You may make it control to a firing stop state after waiting for completion | finish. Further, for example, when the game is in one of the rounds in the big hit game, it is possible to wait until the end of the round and then control the firing stop state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the period until the firing stop state is extended during the big hit gaming state is shown as an advantageous state for the player, but not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, for example, If the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the period until the firing stop state may be lengthened in the probability variation state (high probability state) or the short time state (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, the big hit middle thresholds (“25” and “35” in the case of the model A, and “ The case of changing to “15” and “25”) is shown, but conversely, it may be configured to change to a threshold value smaller than the normal time threshold value during the big hit game. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. In the example shown in FIG. 119, a threshold smaller than the normal threshold as the big hit middle threshold (in this example, in the case of model A, the first abnormality determination threshold “15” and the second abnormality determination threshold “25”). In the case of model B, when an abnormality such as clogging occurs during a big hit game by changing to the first abnormality determination threshold “5” and the second abnormality determination threshold “15”) It is possible to control at the time of abnormality earlier than the normal gaming state. Accordingly, when a clogging or the like occurs in a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player, an abnormality can be notified at an early stage, and a situation in which recognition of the abnormality is delayed can be prevented.

  According to this embodiment, the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold are set as the abnormality determination threshold, and it is determined that the first abnormality determination threshold has been reached. First abnormality control (in this example, abnormality notification and external output) is executed based on the determination, and second abnormality control is performed based on the determination that the second abnormality determination threshold has been reached. (In this example, the control to the firing stop state and the firing stop notification) are executed. Therefore, the first abnormality time control and the second abnormality time control can be executed at different timings by making the first abnormality time determination threshold value different from the second abnormality time determination threshold value. It is possible to perform control during abnormal conditions. More specifically, as in this example, when the first abnormality control and the second abnormality control are configured so as to perform abnormality notification and stop firing of game balls to the game area, respectively, abnormality notification and firing are performed. It is possible to prevent the stop state from occurring at the same time (step-by-step from the abnormality notification to the launch stop state), and to prevent the fun of the game from being reduced more than necessary. it can.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 includes the glass door 6 that is installed to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame (the main body frame including the wooden frame 4 and the front frame (cell) 5). Then, after the abnormal time control is started, after the glass door 6 is opened, the abnormal time control is canceled based on the fact that the glass door 6 is further closed, and the predetermined limit after the glass door 6 is closed. During the period (in this example, 10 seconds), the abnormal control is not executed. For this reason, after the abnormal control is canceled, the abnormal control is executed again until the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls passing through the collection unit falls below the abnormality determination threshold. It is possible to prevent this, and it is possible to prevent the abnormal control from occurring frequently unnecessarily.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, based on the opening of the glass door 6, control which displays the number of game balls enclosed in the enclosure area | region of the pachinko machine 2 is performed. Therefore, the number of game balls enclosed when the glass door 6 is opened can be grasped.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the gaming state changes (in this example, the timing at which the normal hit state first becomes the big hit gaming state, or the timing at which the big hit gaming state first becomes the normal gaming state) Use to set the threshold value for abnormal determination. Then, a larger value is set as the threshold value for determining the abnormality when compared with the case where the normal gaming state is controlled at the timing when the state shifts to the advantageous gaming state (in this example, the big hit gaming state). Therefore, by changing the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality, it is possible to easily prevent the launch of the game ball to the game area 27 during the advantageous game state from being stopped more than necessary.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the launch stop notification is performed when the launch stop state is controlled. Therefore, since it can be easily recognized that the fire has been stopped by the fire stop notification, it is possible to take immediate action to cancel the fire stop state. In this case, the firing stop notification is performed in different notification modes depending on whether the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the normal game state. Therefore, since it is possible to easily recognize in which gaming state the shooting is stopped, even in the case where the plurality of gaming machines are simultaneously in the shooting stopped state, the shooting is stopped in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to deal with abnormalities with priority from existing gaming machines.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 is configured to release the firing stop state after the launch stop state is started (in this example, the pachinko machine 2 is further closed after the glass door 6 is opened). Detect and release). Then, when the launch stop state is released, it is determined whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model A or the model B, whether the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state or the normal gaming state, Based on the determination result, the abnormality determination threshold is reset. Therefore, when the launch stop state is released, the gaming state has changed (the advantageous gaming state may have changed to the normal gaming state, or the normal gaming state has changed to the advantageous gaming state) However, it is possible to reliably reset the threshold for abnormality determination according to the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the current gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when the launch stop state is released, whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 is the model A or the model B, and whether the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state) Although the case where both the normal gaming state and the gaming state are determined is shown (see FIG. 112), only one of the model of the pachinko machine 2 and the gaming state is determined, and an abnormal time is determined according to the determination result. The determination threshold value may be reset.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, is a warning condition established before the difference between the game balls entering the game area 27 and the game balls passing through the collection unit reaches the second abnormality determination threshold value? (In this example, whether or not the first abnormality determination threshold has been reached) is determined, and a warning notification (in this example, the first abnormality control is performed) is determined based on the determination that the warning condition is satisfied. Anomaly notification performed in step 1). For this reason, the warning notification is performed, so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the firing stop state in advance.

  In this embodiment, the same condition as the warning condition regardless of whether the game state is controlled to the advantageous game state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the normal game state. It may be configured to determine whether or not is established. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing still another specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. In the example shown in FIG. 120, regardless of whether it is a big hit middle threshold, a normal threshold or a power failure recovery threshold, the same as the first abnormality determination threshold in the case of model A The value “20” is set, and in the case of model B, the same value “10” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold. Therefore, when the payout control microcomputer 170 executes the determination process of step S210, the first abnormal time determination in which the value of the floating ball counter is always the same regardless of whether or not it is the big hit middle threshold value. It is determined whether or not the threshold value is exceeded (“20” for model A, “10” for model B). It is always determined whether or not the same condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, when being controlled in the advantageous gaming state, the warning is notified earlier than in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state. This can be done to avoid this.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when power supply is started, it is based on game information (for example, the value of the floating ball counter at the time of power failure) stored in the backup RAM (RAM 173 in this example). The control state is restored to the state before the power supply to the pachinko machine 2 is stopped, and a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) elapses after the restoration control is executed. The normal time threshold value (in this example, “20” and “30” for model A, “10” and “20” for model B) as a threshold value for abnormal time determination) Threshold values (in this example, “25” and “35” for model A and “15” and “25” for model B) are set, and when a predetermined period elapses, a threshold value for abnormality determination Is changed from the return threshold to the normal threshold and The difference number (in this example, the current value of the floating ball counter in this example) is identified by the information included in the game information stored in the backup RAM when the power supply is started (in this example) Then, it is updated by excluding the number of floating balls at the time of return, and it is determined whether or not the number of differences after the update has reached the threshold value for abnormality determination. Therefore, in the enclosed ball type gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp that an abnormality has occurred due to the abnormality control.

  In addition, when the power supply is started, the abnormality determination threshold value can be changed to the recovery threshold value so that the abnormality control can be performed. Therefore, even when the power failure is recovered, the abnormality control can be appropriately performed. . In other words, there may be game balls that do not reach the recovery unit and remain in the game area 27 until power supply is resumed, and there may be game balls that pass through the recovery unit during a power outage. In the state of, it does not necessarily reflect the appropriate difference number in the game information that was backed up (it is expected that it is in a state that recognizes a difference number that is larger than the actual difference number) . For this reason, if it is determined whether or not the threshold value for abnormality determination has been reached while maintaining the normal threshold value, there is a risk of excessive control during abnormality. Therefore, when power supply is started, the threshold value for abnormality determination is changed to a threshold value for return that is larger than the normal threshold value (in this example, “20” and “30” to “25” for model A). ”And“ 35 ”, and in the case of the model A,“ 10 ”and“ 20 ”are changed to“ 15 ”and“ 25 ”), and the control at the time of abnormality is performed so that the control at the time of abnormality is excessive. It is possible to prevent abnormal operation and to properly control when an abnormality occurs even after a power failure recovery.

  In this embodiment, the second detection means detects the total number of game balls that pass through each winning port and out port 145, and a foul ball detection switch 33 that detects only foul balls. However, the implementation form of the second detection means is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, detection switches each capable of detecting each winning opening, out opening 145, and foul ball are individually provided, and the second detection switch provided individually for each winning opening, out port 145, and foul ball is used as the second. Detection means may be realized. Also, for example, one detection switch capable of detecting all the winning holes, out holes 145 and foul balls is provided, and the total number of game balls passing through the respective winning holes, out holes 145 and foul balls is detected. The second detection means may be realized by one possible detection switch.

  In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 170 updates the floating ball number counter value based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means, and based on the floating ball number counter value. Although the case where the control at the time of abnormality is executed based on the determination that the difference between the game ball launched into the game area 27 and the game ball which has passed through the collection unit has reached the threshold for determination at the time of abnormality is shown. The main control board 16 may be configured to execute on the game control microcomputer 160 side. In this case, for example, on the game control microcomputer 160 side, similarly, the value of the floating ball number counter is updated based on the detection results of the first detection unit and the second detection unit, and the value of the floating ball number counter is set. Based on the fact that it is determined that the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls that have passed through the collection unit has reached the threshold value for abnormality determination, processing for executing the abnormality control is executed. What is necessary is just to comprise.

  Further, a method for recognizing the difference between the number of game balls launched into the game area 27 and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit is, for example, one counter (in this example, as shown in this embodiment). The counter value is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the first detection means (launch of game balls to the game area 27) using the floating ball number counter), and the detection of the game balls of the recovery unit (recovery unit game balls) By subtracting 1 from the value of the counter based on (passing), the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls passed through the collection unit may be obtained (that is, fired into the game area 27). This may be recognized by managing only the increase / decrease in the number of game balls present in the game area 27 without directly recognizing the number of game balls and the number of game balls passing through the collection unit). It can't be limited to things. For example, a first counter that counts the number of detections of the first detection unit and a second counter that counts the number of detections of the second detection unit are provided separately, and the value of the first counter is used when performing threshold determination. The difference between the value of the second counter and the value of the second counter may be obtained to determine the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls passed through the collection unit (that is, fired into the game area 27). The number of game balls may be directly counted, and the number of game balls passing through the number of times part may be directly counted to obtain a difference between the directly counted game balls). As described above, by controlling the number of game balls in the game area 27, or the number of game balls to be fired in the game area 27 and the number of game balls to be passed through the number part, the number of game balls to be fired in the game area 27 What is necessary is just to be comprised so that recognition of the difference number with the number of game balls which passes a collection | recovery part is possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value of the floating ball counter is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the first detection means (launch of game balls to the game area 27), and the detection of the second detection means (each winning mouth, The case where the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1 based on the passing of the game ball of the out port 145 and the foul ball return port 150 is shown. Conversely, the floating ball number counter based on the detection of the first detecting means. 1 may be subtracted and 1 may be added to the value of the floating ball number counter based on the detection by the second detection means. In this case, for example, “50” is set as the initial value of the floating ball counter, the value of the floating ball counter is decremented by 1 when detected by the first detector, and the floating ball count is detected by the second detector. What is necessary is just to add 1 to the value of the counter. Then, when the value of the floating ball counter is reduced to a predetermined value (for example, “30” or “25”), it is determined that the abnormality threshold value has been reached and the abnormality control is executed. .

  When the number of floating balls is managed in a subtractive manner in this way, the difference between the number of gaming balls launched into the game area 27 and the gaming ball that has passed through the collection unit reaches the threshold for abnormality determination. That is, the value of the number counter is equal to or less than a threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality. Further, the second abnormality determination threshold value exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold value means that the second abnormality determination threshold value is smaller than the first abnormality determination threshold value. As described above, if the second abnormality determination threshold is a threshold corresponding to a larger difference number than the first abnormality determination threshold, whether the floating ball number is managed by the addition method or the subtraction method? Does not matter.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game information is backed up on the payout control microcomputer 170 side, and the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls passed through the collection unit is a threshold for determining when there is an abnormality. Although the case where the control at the time of abnormality is performed by determining whether or not the error has been reached is shown, the microcomputer and the control at the time of abnormality may be configured to be executed by a microcomputer mounted on different substrates. For example, game information may be backed up on the game control microcomputer 160 side mounted on the main control board 16, and abnormal control may be performed on the payout control microcomputer 170 side. The game information may be backed up on the side of the microcomputer 170 for the game, and the abnormality control may be performed on the side of the game control microcomputer 160 mounted on the main control board 16. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 2 performs only the backup of the game state, and whether or not the difference between the game balls launched into the game area 27 and the game balls that have passed through the collection unit has reached a threshold value for abnormality determination Such a determination process and an abnormal time control execution process may be executed on the hall management computer 1 side.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the return control is executed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 2 is started, the measurement timer is set immediately after the power failure recovery (see step S14), and for a predetermined period (in this example, 10 seconds). ) Is measured, but the timing for starting the measurement in the predetermined period is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 2 is started, the measurement timer is set after the power failure recovery at the timing when the first detection means or the second detection means is first detected, and measurement for a predetermined period is started. You may do it. In addition, for example, at the timing of detecting the first launch of a game ball, the measurement timer may be set after the power failure recovery to start the measurement for a predetermined period. In short, the player started the game after the power failure recovery You may make it start measurement of a predetermined period after recognizing this.

  In this embodiment, the case where both the first abnormality determination threshold and the second abnormality determination threshold are changed as the abnormality determination threshold at the time of power failure recovery is shown. It is not necessary to change, and only one of them may be changed. In this case, for example, only the first abnormality determination threshold may be changed, or only the second abnormality determination threshold may be changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the game ball is caused to enter the game area 27 by launching the game ball by the hitting ball launching device has been shown. However, the mode in which the game ball enters the game area 27 is described in this embodiment. It is not limited to the one that launches game balls as shown in the form. For example, an opening for supplying game balls may be provided above the game area 27, and the game balls may be allowed to enter the game area 27 by dropping the game balls from above the game area 27.

  According to this embodiment, when power supply is started, it is determined whether or not the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal, and the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal. The return control is executed based on the determination that it is. In addition, when it is determined that the game information stored in the backup RAM is normal, a return threshold is set as a threshold for abnormality determination, and the game information stored in the backup RAM is not normal. Is determined, the normal threshold value is set as the threshold value for abnormality determination. Therefore, set the threshold value for recovery only when backup data is properly stored, otherwise set the normal threshold value, and set the appropriate threshold value for abnormal determination at power failure recovery. Thus, it is possible to perform control at the time of abnormality.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormality control is executed by performing abnormality notification (in this example, a predetermined abnormality notification screen is displayed on the display unit 54) in a predetermined notification mode. Therefore, a game store clerk or the like can easily grasp the occurrence of the abnormality by the abnormality notification, and can recover from the abnormal state easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormal time control is executed by stopping the launch of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game from being continued in an abnormal state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the abnormality control is executed by externally outputting an abnormality signal capable of specifying the occurrence of abnormality to the hall management computer 1. Therefore, by using the hall management computer 1 for confirmation, it is possible for a game shop clerk or the like to easily understand the occurrence of an abnormality and to easily recover from the abnormal state. In this case, for example, when an abnormality signal is externally output from the pachinko machine 2 to the hall management computer 1, the abnormality information is transmitted from the hall management computer 1 to the remote control possessed by each game shop clerk, and the remote control that has received the abnormality information. The game shop clerk who has seen the abnormality recognizes the occurrence of the abnormality, goes to the pachinko machine where the abnormality has occurred, opens and closes the glass door 2, and clears the clogging etc. .

  In this embodiment, as abnormality control, abnormality notification is performed in the above-described predetermined notification mode, the launch of the game ball is stopped, and an abnormality signal is output to the hall management computer 1 externally. However, the present invention is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, for example, performing abnormality notification in the above-described predetermined notification mode, stopping the launch of a game ball, or abnormality You may comprise so that any one or two of outputting a signal to the management computer 1 for halls may be performed. Further, for example, an error signal may be transmitted to the card unit 3 and further output to an external device such as the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to notify an occurrence of an abnormality to a game store clerk or the like without performing abnormality notification.

  Also, the control mode at the time of abnormality is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and control at the time of abnormality can be performed in various modes. For example, the abnormality control may be performed by lighting or blinking a lamp or LED provided in the pachinko machine 2 in a predetermined lighting or blinking pattern. Further, for example, the abnormal control may be performed by outputting a predetermined warning sound from a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 2 or outputting a sound such as “the number of game balls is abnormal”.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, abnormality notification and external output as the first abnormality control, and control to the firing stop state and firing stop notification as the second abnormality control are always executed. Although the case has been shown, only one of the first abnormality control and the second abnormality control may be executed according to the gaming state. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, only the first abnormality control (abnormality notification or the like) may be performed, and the second abnormality control (control to the firing stop state) may not be performed. If constituted in this way, in the big hit game state, priority is given to digestion of the big hit game, so that no disadvantage is caused to the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the abnormal control is started, the abnormal control release means for releasing the abnormal control (in this example, it is detected that the glass door 6 is further closed after being opened). And release). When the abnormality control is canceled, the abnormality determination threshold is changed from the recovery threshold to the big hit middle threshold or the normal threshold. Therefore, since the return-time threshold value is surely changed from the return threshold value to the big hit threshold value or the normal time threshold value after the abnormal-time control is canceled, it is possible to prevent a situation where the return-time threshold value remains after the abnormal-time control is canceled. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the normal time abnormal control cannot be performed properly.

  In this embodiment, for example, a so-called dead ball effect may be executed using a game ball won in a normal winning opening or the like. For example, after a game ball is won in a normal winning opening or the like, the game ball is guided to a predetermined circulation path provided in the game area 27, and the game ball is circulated in the circulation path. May be executed. In this case, for example, when the gaming state is in the probable state, the game balls are led to the circulation path at a high rate so that the ball effect appears dyingly, and whether the gaming state is in the probable state or not is expected. You may make it raise. If the ball effect is configured to be executable in this way, the proportion of floating balls in the game area 27 increases accordingly, so that the game ball may be replenished for the ball effect. The threshold for abnormality determination may be changed (the threshold value is increased) according to the number of game balls replenished.

  In this embodiment, the number of game balls waiting between the collecting unit (in this example, each winning port, out port 145, foul ball return port 150) and the hitting ball launching device is determined for abnormality. You may comprise so that the determination means which can determine whether it is in the state where the number of the threshold value of this is exceeded is provided. For example, the number of waiting game balls is accumulated up to the maximum number of threshold values for determination at the time of abnormality (for example, the maximum number “35” that can be taken as the second determination threshold value at the time of abnormality in the example shown in FIG. 108). In this case, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a may be arranged at a location in the lifting device 190 where the gaming ball corresponding to the maximum value will be located. If the detection control microcomputer 170 receives the detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the payout control microcomputer 170 determines whether the number of game balls waiting between the collecting unit and the ball striking device is abnormal. It may be determined that the maximum number of threshold values (for example, “35”) has been exceeded.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, since the number of game balls is managed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide the management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible. it can. In particular, the P platform has a short replacement cycle at the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be replaced early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. And if a failure does not occur, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the P units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the game balls not on the P units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the P units.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a fixed value (in this example, “25” and “35” in the case of model A and “15” in the case of model B is set as the threshold value for recovery set at the time of power failure recovery. However, instead of setting a fixed value, for example, a value corresponding to game information stored in the backup RAM may be set. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which a value corresponding to the game information stored in the backup RAM is set as the return threshold set at the time of power failure recovery will be described.

  In the following description, parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a payout control main process in the second embodiment. In the payout control main process, if the check result is normal in step S11, the payout control CPU 171 sets the return time threshold value as the abnormality determination threshold value (step S12A).

  FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, when the power failure is restored, the backup value backed up in the backup RAM (that is, the value of the floating ball counter at the time of the power failure) is used as the threshold value for normal time. (In this example, “20” and “30” in the case of the model A and “10” and “20” in the case of the model B) are used, which is different from the first embodiment. . Therefore, in this embodiment, in step S12A, the payout control CPU 171 uses the value of the floating ball counter backed up in the backup RAM as the normal threshold value (in the case of model A in this example). A value added to “20” and “30”, and in the case of model B, “10” and “20”) is set as a threshold value for abnormality determination. For example, the payout control CPU 171 first determines whether the model of the pachinko machine 2 specified by the model designation command received in step S10A is model A or model B. In the case of model A, if the value of the floating ball counter that was backed up is “3”, it is added to the normal threshold values (in this example, “20” and “30”). Thus, the first abnormality determination threshold “23” and the second abnormality determination threshold “33” are set as the abnormality determination threshold. In the case of model B, if the value of the floating ball counter that was backed up is “3”, it is added to the normal threshold values (in this example, “10” and “20”). Thus, the first abnormality determination threshold “13” and the second abnormality determination threshold “23” are set as the abnormality determination threshold.

  However, if the backup value that has been backed up is large, the threshold value for determining the abnormal time that is set becomes too large, and the abnormal time control may not be appropriately performed. For this reason, it is desirable to provide an upper limit value as a threshold value for abnormality determination to be set. For example, if the value of the backed floating ball number counter exceeds “6”, the upper limit value (model type) is used as the threshold for abnormality determination regardless of the backed up floating ball number counter value. In the case of A, “25” and “35”, and in the case of model B, “15” and “25”) may be set.

  Note that the processes other than step S12A are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the return threshold is set based on the game information stored in the backup RAM. Therefore, in addition to the same effects as in the first embodiment, at the time of recovery from a power failure, setting an appropriate return threshold value according to the game situation specified by the backed-up game information, and performing abnormal control Can do.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
The first embodiment and the second embodiment show a case where the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that performs a variable display game that is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on a variable display result of identification information such as symbols in the variable display device. However, not only in such a gaming machine, for example, a game ball that has entered a variable winning ball apparatus (an accessory) provided in the gaming area 27 has won a predetermined specific area in the variable winning ball apparatus. It may be applied to a gaming machine that performs an accessory game that is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on the game. Hereinafter, a third embodiment applied to a gaming machine that performs an accessory game will be described.

  In the following description, parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 123 is a front view of the game area 27 of the pachinko machine 2 according to the third embodiment viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a case where the present invention is applied to a gaming machine configured to be capable of executing only a so-called bonus game will be described. For example, a game machine that can be executed by combining a variable display game and a bonus game. You may apply.

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first and second embodiments, the game area 27 is provided with an outlet, a foul ball return opening, etc. The illustration is omitted. Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game area 27 is provided with each winning port such as a normal winning port, a big winning port, and a starting winning port. May be.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in this embodiment, in the game area 27, there is provided a variable winning ball device (a combination) 200 into which a game ball can enter. The variable winning ball apparatus 200 is provided with a winning hole 201 through which a game ball can enter, and an accessory winning switch 201a that can detect the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 200 from the winning hole 201 is provided. Yes.

  It should be noted that an opening / closing door that can be opened and closed is provided at the winning opening 201 so that a game ball can enter the variable winning ball apparatus 200 only when the opening / closing door is open, You may comprise so that a game ball may enter easily. In this case, for example, the open / close door provided in the winning opening 201 may be opened for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening provided in the game area 27. In addition, for example, when applied to a game machine that can be executed in combination with a variable display game and an accessory game, the variable display result of identification information such as symbols in the variable display device is a predetermined display result (for example, The opening / closing door provided at the winning opening 201 may be opened for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 200, there is provided a specific winning port 202 as a specific region where a game ball can be won, and a specific region switch 202a capable of detecting a gaming ball won in the specific winning port 202 is provided. It has been. Further, two discharge ports 203 through which game balls can enter are provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 200, and an accessory discharge switch 203a capable of detecting game balls that have entered the discharge ports 203 is provided. It has been.

  The game balls that have entered the variable winning ball apparatus 200 from the winning opening 201 are guided to the specific winning opening 202 or the discharge opening 203 via the variable winning ball apparatus 200. In this case, after entering the variable winning ball apparatus 200, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has finally won the specific winning opening 202. On the other hand, when the game ball finally enters the discharge port 203 after entering the variable winning ball device 200, the game ball is discharged out of the variable winning ball device 200 as it is and is not controlled to the big hit game state. ). In the case of a big hit game state, the big winning opening provided separately from the variable winning ball apparatus 200 may be controlled to be open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, or the variable winning ball apparatus 200 may be configured to be openable and closable so that the variable winning ball apparatus 200 is controlled to be open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times.

  The variable winning ball apparatus 200 can be configured in various ways. For example, a plurality of game ball paths are provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 200, and the ease of winning a prize to the specific winning opening 202 is determined depending on which path the game balls entering the variable winning ball apparatus 200 pass through. May be different. Further, for example, a movable member may be provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 200, and the trajectory of a game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus 200 may be changed by moving the movable member.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game balls that have entered the winning holes (large winning holes, starting holes, normal winning holes) and out holes are detected by the merge path detection switch 32. In this embodiment, in addition to these, game balls that have won the specific winning slot 202 and game balls that have entered the outlet 203 are finally detected by the merge path detection switch 32. Shall. Then, processing similar to that in steps S205 and S206 of the abnormality determination processing shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 202 in the variable winning ball apparatus 200 or the discharge opening 203 has been entered. Also for the game balls, the value of the floating ball number counter is decremented by 1 based on the detection by the joining path detection switch 32. Note that the game balls that have won the specific winning opening 202 and the game balls that have entered the discharge opening 203 are routed through a path different from the joining path detection switch 32, for example, the specific area switch 202a or the accessory discharge switch 203. Based on the detection signal from, the value of the floating ball number counter may be subtracted by one.

  FIG. 124 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the payout control board 17 in the third embodiment. 124 also shows the main control board 16, the display effect control board 53, the power supply board 900, and the like. As shown in FIG. 124, in this embodiment, in the payout control microcomputer 170 mounted on the payout control board 17, in addition to the input signals shown in the first embodiment, a prize winning switch Detection signals from 201a, the specific area switch 202a and the accessory discharge switch 203a are input.

  FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the threshold value for determination at the time of abnormality in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 125, in this embodiment, a threshold for winning a prize is used in place of the big hit middle threshold shown in the first embodiment as the threshold for abnormality determination. As shown in FIG. 125, in this embodiment, when a prize is being entered in which a game ball is entering the variable prize-ball apparatus (right) 200, a threshold value for determining when an abnormality has occurred. Is larger than that at the time of power failure recovery, and in the case of model A, “30” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold and “40” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. . In the case of model B, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold, and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an abnormality determination threshold value changing process according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the abnormality determination threshold value changing process, the payout control microcomputer 170 (specifically, the payout control CPU 171) first inputs a detection signal from the accessory prize winning switch 201a. (Step S30A). If the detection signal from the prize winning switch 201a is input, the payout control CPU 171 counts the number of game balls present in the variable prize ball device (thing) 200 in the bonus game balls. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S30B).

  In this embodiment, after the game ball actually enters the variable winning ball apparatus 200 from the winning opening 201, the game ball counter in the bonus game is based on the input of the detection signal from the bonus winning switch 201a. Although the case where the value is incremented by 1 is shown, it is not always necessary to increment the value of the in-game game ball number counter by 1 after detecting that the game ball has actually entered the variable winning ball apparatus 200. For example, a sensor is provided in a passage immediately before being led to the winning opening 201, and based on input signals of detection signals from these sensors, it is considered that the game ball has passed the winning opening 201 (that is, the winning opening 201 is It is also possible to add 1 to the value of the in-game game ball counter (which has only been led to an area that is sure to pass, and has not actually passed through the winning hole 201).

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the detection signal from the specific area switch 202a is input (step S30C). If the detection signal is input from the specific area switch 202a, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts 1 from the value of the in-item game ball counter (step S30D).

  Further, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether or not the detection signal from the accessory discharge switch 203a has been input (step S30E). If the detection signal from the accessory discharge switch 203a has been input, the payout control CPU 171 subtracts 1 from the value of the in-item game ball counter (step S30F).

  The processes in steps S30 to S34 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  If the value of the measurement timer after power failure recovery is 0 in step S30, the payout control CPU 171 checks whether the value of the in-game game ball counter is 0 (step 171). S34A). If the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus is not 0 (that is, if there is a game ball in the variable winning ball device 200), the payout control CPU 171 may change the variable winning ball device (the bonus game ball). ) It is confirmed whether or not a winning combination winning flag indicating that a game ball is present in 200 is set (step S34B). If the winning prize winning flag is not set, the payout control CPU 171 sets the winning prize threshold as an abnormality determination threshold (step S34C). Specifically, in the case of model A, “30” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold and “40” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. In the case of the model B, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Then, the payout control CPU 171 sets a winning prize winning flag (step S34D).

  If the value of the bonus game ball counter is 0 (that is, if there is no game ball in the variable winning ball device 200), the payout control CPU 171 has the bonus winning flag set. It is confirmed whether or not (step S34E). If the winning prize winning flag is set, the payout control CPU 171 sets the normal time threshold value as the abnormality determination threshold value (step S34F). Specifically, in the case of the model A, “20” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold and “30” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. In the case of the model B, “10” is set as the first abnormality determination threshold and “20” is set as the second abnormality determination threshold. Then, the payout control CPU 171 resets the winning prize winning flag (step S34G).

  By executing the processing of steps S34A to S34G, the game ball enters from the winning opening 201 and enters the variable winning ball device 200 from the state where there is no gaming ball in the variable winning ball device (object) 200. When the ball is changed to a state in which a ball is present, a bonus winning threshold value is set as a threshold value for determining an abnormality. On the other hand, from the state where the game balls are present in the variable winning ball device 200, all the game balls are discharged from the specific winning port 202 or the discharge port 203 and no game balls are present in the variable winning ball device 202. When changed, the normal time threshold is set as the abnormality determination threshold.

  In this embodiment, after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) elapses after power failure recovery and the measurement timer times out after power failure recovery, the processing of steps S34A to S34G is executed and the prize is being awarded. Although the case where it is configured so that a threshold value for use may be set is shown, the processing of steps S34A to S34G is executed even after a predetermined period has elapsed after the recovery from the power failure, May be configured to be settable.

  Also in this embodiment, in addition to the processing of steps S34A to S34G, the same processing as S35 to S37 shown in the first embodiment can be executed so that a big hit game is being played. May be configured to be able to set a big hit middle threshold.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to execute the game of a game, a game ball is present in the variable winning ball apparatus (game) 200. On the basis of this, a threshold for winning a prize is set as a threshold for determining when an abnormality occurs, and an abnormality control is performed based on the threshold for winning an accessory. Therefore, even in a gaming machine configured to execute an accessory game, the execution frequency of abnormal control is appropriately adjusted according to the gaming state (whether or not a game ball is present in the variable winning ball apparatus 200) Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the abnormal control according to the gaming state. Specifically, in a game configured to play an accessory game, when a game ball enters the variable winning ball apparatus 200, generally, the time during which the game ball stays in the variable winning ball apparatus 200 is retained. The number of floating balls tends to increase even during normal operation as compared to the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to delay the timing of performing abnormality notification or the timing of stopping the firing, and appropriately perform control at the time of abnormality.

  Next, modifications and feature points in the above-described embodiments will be described below.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the P-side display 54. ing. When the number of game balls is displayed on the display unit on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in each of the above embodiments to the P units having no display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. Further, when the display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (2) In the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 46, the case where a 10-second weight is provided for the floating ball processing waiting time on the CU side is shown. A weight of 10 seconds may be provided. Further, instead of providing a weight, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the number of winning balls = 0 is determined on the P platform side, or the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the merge path detection switch 32 is used. The number of detected balls may be determined to be 0, and it may be determined that the processing of floating balls has been completed.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, in the P units that have received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball launching motor 18 is stopped to stop hitting the hitting ball, and the changing display device that is changing is stopped or started. Although what has not been shown until the fluctuation of the fluctuation display device based on the memory is shown, the fluctuation of the fluctuation display device may be stopped instead.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described with reference to FIG. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), there is no need to wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the CU alone, and thereafter an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, a command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is sent from the P unit to the CU. It may be a communication form in which the CU sends a response to the P units in response.

  (6) Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, communication is performed between the CU and the P unit at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the necessity of communication occurs Alternatively, data may be transmitted from one of the CU or P units to the other.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P units to the CU. On the side, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the P units returning the rejection ON operation response, the operation response including the addition / subtraction ball number and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the CU side, it is determined whether or not the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, thereby determining whether the request has been rejected. Also good.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P base is detected, the shot is stopped on the P base side and the play is stopped. Although what to do is shown, it is not limited to it, You may control to the state which can continue a game, without stopping hitting ball | bowl launching on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, when the command from the CU has not been transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the P platform determines that communication has been interrupted by the processing of FIG. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. Referring to FIG. 4, the gaming machine communication unit 325 and the payout control board 17 are connected by the signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5V) from the card unit 3 is connected. Is provided with a connection detection signal line that is input to the pachinko machine 2 side. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the gaming machine communication unit 325 and the payout control board 17 are formed of the same cable, and the cable is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 20 are detached, and the card unit 3 is also connected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is cut off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been cut off due to the input of the detection signal.

  (10) In the process of FIG. 37, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed not to reject the correction request. However, there are cases in which a serious error that cannot be corrected, such as a game ball, has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and when it has not been corrected, control to shift to an error state may be performed.

  That is, when the CU determines that a game machine (for example, P machines) cannot be added even after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a predetermined error state is included.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a severe error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 so that the hall management computer 1 notifies the error. It may be possible to go and encourage an artificial response by the staff.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine. However, the gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko machine, and other gaming machines such as a slot machine (pachislot machine). It may be. This type of slot machine is generally provided with a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery thereof. The player starts the rotation by operating the start lever, and the player operates the stop button provided for each reel, so that it is within the predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing. To stop rotation. A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, special roles, and replaying roles. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the special role winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the winning of the re-gamer, it is possible to obtain a profit that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the number of bets.

  In order for winning of each combination to occur, generally, it is a condition that a winning is made by an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  In the case of such a slot machine, as a method for prohibiting a game when a command for prohibiting a game is received from a CU, for example, disabling the betting number input operation can be considered.

  In addition, when applied to a slot machine, instead of the floating ball processing waiting time described with reference to FIGS. adopt. The waiting time for ending one game is, for example, the time from when all reels of the slot machine start to rotate until all reels stop and credits are awarded when a winning occurs. This time can vary according to the late timing of the reel stop operation by the player. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable to set an expected time in advance.

(12) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of balls to be added. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (13) The P platform does not send two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

  (14) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above. The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it is conceivable that the additional ball number is transmitted to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (15) In each of the above-described embodiments, two counters, that is, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that adds by an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts by a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(16) Each of the above embodiments includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. To the gaming machine, the sub-point update means cancels the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing subtraction of the point When the command is received, either when the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or when the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the secondary score storage means.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a hall management computer or the like.

(18) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable by radio instead of wired connection.
(19) By providing the main control board 16 with the function of the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 may not be provided in the pachinko machine 2.

  (20) The payout control board 17 performs control to stop the driving of the ball hitting motor 18 when the game ball number counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control board 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control board 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are performed by the display unit 54. However, the pachinko machine 2 that does not include the presentation unit 50 is shown. It may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, the P base 2 responds to the command. Display control is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (22) In the possession ball sharing process shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the stock card stocked in the CU is used as the card B ejected for split transfer (share possession) to another person. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 from the outside of the CU, and the ball for split transfer (shareball sharing) is recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, between the discharging process of the own card as the first process and the discharging process of the shared card as the second process, A shared card insertion process is added.

  (23) In the holding ball sharing process shown in FIG. 84, the visitor card B is first inserted and the game is started. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the ball is taken out from the card stock section in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card returned to the card may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting banknotes, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock unit when the number of game balls is generated due to the winning. In this case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls associated with the card is similarly varied. Then, when the operation of sharing the ball is performed, the number of game balls associated with the card is changed to the shared points, the card is discharged as a transfer card, and taken out from the card stock section again. You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the share score for the said game ball | bowl from the said number of game balls.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 38), and a communication disconnection request is transmitted by itself. When it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed after disconnection, or when it is determined that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P unit do not match, the process shown in FIG. Execute the connection sequence at the time of connection. However, in addition to them or instead of any of them, a signal (for example, recovery) indicating that the communication connection has been disconnected from the P unit during the game (when not in standby) with the resumption of the connection sequence Data, etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 37 based on the signal.

  (25) In the game ball split transfer (money ball sharing) process shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the split transfer is performed on the condition that the current game ball is determined to be more than the predetermined number than the game balls to be split transferred. You may make it accept | permit. In the case of FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, for example, split transfer (shared ball sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current game ball is 200 balls or more than the split game balls. In the case of FIG. 85, the divided transfer (money ball sharing) is performed on the condition that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is 100 balls or more than the game ball to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (26) In the process of split transfer (shared ball sharing) of game balls shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the number of game balls in the game is card B until the card B is discharged after the card A is discharged. If the number of possessed balls to be written and transferred is no longer reached, control is performed so that the sharing of the point is canceled and the card B is not ejected.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the unit of the number of game balls and the number of possessed balls is the same. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the units of both may be different. For example, if the number of game balls “1” is converted into the number of balls, “10” may be obtained.

  (28) In FIG. 84, when a return operation at the end of a game is performed, a card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section is taken out and discharged in association with the number of game balls in the stock card Instead, you may have a game attendant bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / extraction port 309, match the number of game balls, and discharge the card. Good.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  The following describes the effects obtained from combinations of various means and various means included in the above embodiments.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control board 17) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-holding point updating means (payout control board 17) for updating the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means according to the change amount;
While the gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped),
The gaming device, when a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, holds the points stored in the main holding point storage means as the points at the end of the game. Point determination means (control unit 323; FIG. 45) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control board 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception to the current reception Information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 5, FIG. 39).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 5). , FIG. 39),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the memory for storing the P game balls is corrected to match the number of game balls in the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control board 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 33; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Substrate 17 and FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a gap between the two, the determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 46 to 47 (with prohibition request)),
When the gaming machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control board 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18, 46-47 "game prohibition").

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to an initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 45, 79, 81 operation instruction (with clear request)),
The gaming machine stores the sub-point storage means based on the reception of information for instructing to set the value of the point stored in the sub-point storage means to an initial value. 45. FIG. 79, FIG. 81 (the payout control board 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) for initializing the value of the score.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for communication with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points, and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game It includes confirmation means (control unit 323; FIG. 45).

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to the use in a game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 5; determining match of the number of game balls);
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the memory for storing the P game balls is corrected to match the number of game balls in the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming apparatus provides information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine (FIG. 33; 200 ms). To the gaming machine in turn,
The score update unit sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information sequentially received (control unit 323, FIG. 39).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval. Point management is possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is played by a player, and a communicably connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20), and the gaming value (prepaid balance) owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using the number of possessed balls or the number of stored balls),
The gaming device is:
Control means (control unit 323) for controlling the operation of the gaming apparatus;
Display means (display 312) for displaying to the player the status according to the control executed by the control means in response to the player's operation;
Transmission means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display a situation corresponding to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, it is possible to display a unique display in a mode matched to the gaming machine, but in the case of a gaming machine not provided with a display means. Even if it exists, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming device side in accordance with the player's operation.

  (2-2) The transmission unit transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing of starting the display of the situation according to the control by the display unit (FIGS. 41 to 45, FIG. 82; to the display 312) The display instruction is transmitted to the P machines and the end instruction for ending the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine is not transmitted (FIG. 82; the display end is instructed) Exit display without sending command).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the shift of the display start timing when both the gaming device and the gaming machine have the display means. Thus, it is possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine side without being restricted by the display end timing on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-3) The gaming device accepts a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded,
The control means executes control for authenticating the received recording medium (FIGS. 41 and 82; inquiry to a host server),
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated,
The transmission means transmits a display instruction to display on the gaming machine that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIGS. 41 and 82; transmit operation instructions including card holding and card insertion processing) ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the received recording medium is being authenticated.

(2-4) The control means adds the points using the game value (prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) owned by the player (FIGS. 41 to 43, FIG. 82; Send an operation instruction including the number of balls to be added = 5000),
The display means displays to the player that the points are being added,
The transmission means transmits a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display that the points are being added (FIGS. 41 to 43, FIG. 82; during addition display).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.

(2-5) The gaming machine can be played with points,
The gaming device adds points by using the player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) (FIGS. 41 to 43, FIG. 82; for example, with addition, request for addition) Send an operation instruction including the number of balls = 5000),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (payout control board 17) for transmitting update information that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(2-6) A connection portion (connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a game is played by the player, and a gaming value (prepaid) owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a balance, number of balls, or number of balls)
Control means (control unit 323) for controlling the operation of the gaming apparatus;
Display means (display 312) for displaying to the player the status according to the control executed by the control means in response to the player's operation;
Transmission means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for transmitting a display instruction for causing the gaming machine to display a situation corresponding to the control executed by the control means.

  According to such a configuration, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a display means, it is possible to display a unique display in a mode matched to the gaming machine, but in the case of a gaming machine not provided with a display means. Even if it exists, the player can recognize the situation according to the control executed on the gaming device side in accordance with the player's operation.

  (2-7) The transmission unit transmits the display instruction in accordance with the timing at which the display of the status according to the control by the display unit is started (FIGS. 41 to 45, 82; to the display 312) The display instruction is transmitted to the P machines and the end instruction for ending the display of the situation according to the control by the gaming machine is not transmitted (FIG. 82; the display end is instructed) Exit display without sending command).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine provided with the display means while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the shift of the display start timing when both the gaming device and the gaming machine have the display means. Thus, it is possible to execute unique display unique to the gaming machine side without being restricted by the display end timing on the gaming apparatus side.

(2-8) The control means executes control for authenticating the recording medium when a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying a player's gaming value is recorded is received. (FIGS. 41 and 82; confirmation to the host server),
The display means displays to the player that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIG. 82),
The transmission means transmits a display instruction to display on the gaming machine that the recording medium is being authenticated (FIGS. 41 and 82; transmit operation instructions including card holding and card insertion processing) ).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the received recording medium is being authenticated.

(2-9) The gaming device accepts a recording medium (card) on which information capable of specifying the gaming value owned by the player is recorded,
The control means, when a recording medium on which information capable of specifying a player-owned game value is recorded is received, a score is obtained using the player-owned game value specified by the recording medium. Add (FIGS. 41 to 43, FIG. 82; with addition, send an operation instruction including the number of balls required for addition = 5000),
The display means displays to the player that the points are being added (FIGS. 41 to 43, FIG. 82; during addition display).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize that the points are being added.

(2-10) The connection unit is connected to be able to communicate with a gaming machine capable of playing a game with points and adding points according to the occurrence of a prize,
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(3-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Backup means for backing up stored data when communication with the gaming device is disconnected (when the connectors 330 and 20 are disconnected, when connection wiring is disconnected, or when the power of the CU is disconnected) (recovery data shown in FIGS. 57 and 64 to 81) The RAM of the payout control board 17 for storing
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (the payout control board 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the gaming machine communication unit 325),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
A score updating means (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine;
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on the end of normal communication (a. Waiting (FIG. 38 The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than (see FIG. 57), b. The connection sequence is resumed after the communication disconnection request is transmitted by itself (see FIG. 57), or c. It is determined whether or not the SQN being transmitted and the SQN transmitted from the P platform are inconsistent, and it is determined that the communication is not completed (abnormal termination) when any of a to c is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is based on the end of normal communication, a command to initialize the stored data backed up by the backup means is transmitted (FIG. 36; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0) , Game When the communication start request including the ball = 0 is transmitted to the P units), and when it is determined that it is based on the abnormal end, a correction request for correcting the stored data backed up by the backup unit to normal data is transmitted. (FIG. 37: A communication start request including SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 3, game ball = 300 is transmitted to the P units),
When the gaming machine receives an instruction to initialize the stored data, the gaming machine initializes the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 36; “sequence number” backed up by P units and "Game ball" is set to 0 according to the information of the CU), and when the correction request is received, the storage data backed up by the backup means is corrected (Fig. 37; backed up by P units) “Sequence number” and “game ball” are matched to the information of the CU).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, in the case of normal termination of communication, the storage data backed up in the gaming machine is initialized, whereas in the case of abnormal termination, the storage data backed up in the gaming machine is corrected. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming device and the gaming machine due to abnormal termination of communication.

(3-2) The gaming apparatus selects and designates the target of the stored data to be corrected among the plurality of types of stored data backed up by the backup means, and transmits a correction request (FIG. 11; data correction request Select and specify the sequence number and game ball with Bit1 and Bit2),
When the game machine receives the correction request, the gaming machine performs a correction process on the storage data selected and specified among the storage data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 37).

  According to such a configuration, in the case of abnormal termination of communication, it is possible to select and correct stored data that needs correction, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-3) The backup unit backs up the data of the change amount of the holding point specified by the specifying unit and the data of the holding point (game ball counter, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter),
The gaming device transmits a transmission request for storage data backed up by the backup means to the gaming machine (transmits a recovery request to P machines),
In response to the transmission request, the gaming machine transmits update information that can specify the amount of change in the points backed up by the backup means to the gaming device (including the previous number of balls and the current number of balls). Send recovery data to CU as recovery response),
The gaming device is:
When it is determined that the disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the score storage means stores the information based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine. A score correction means (FIG. 37; a control unit 323 that corrects a game ball or the like in accordance with the content of the recovery response) that performs a score correction process;
When it is determined that the disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the score data of the stored data backed up by the backup unit is corrected by the score correction unit A correction request for correcting to the processed score is transmitted (FIGS. 11 and 37; a communication start request including data whose data correction request Bit2 is “1” is transmitted to P units),
When the game machine receives the correction request, the gaming machine corrects the score data among the stored data backed up by the backup means (FIG. 37).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data such as score data due to abnormal termination of communication, the score data can be selected and corrected.

  (3-4) The gaming device updates the number each time data is transmitted / received between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and confirms whether or not communication is properly performed. When the communication number is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal end is determined based on the abnormal value of the communication number (FIG. 70, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the communication number needs to be corrected due to abnormal termination of communication, it is possible to select and correct the data of the communication number, and the resumed communication can be performed properly. It can be confirmed based on an appropriate communication number.

(3-5) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine (pachinko machine 2), the score update means (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information; Including,
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, it is determined whether the disconnection with the gaming machine immediately before the start of the communication is based on the end of normal communication, and based on the end of normal communication When it is determined that the game machine side is instructed, an instruction to initialize the stored data backed up from the time of communication disconnection is transmitted on the gaming machine side (FIG. 36; SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball) When a determination is made based on abnormal termination, a correction request for correcting the stored data backed up on the gaming machine side to normal data is transmitted. (FIG. 37: A communication start request including SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 3, and game ball = 300 is transmitted to P units).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, in the case of normal termination of communication, the storage data backed up in the gaming machine is initialized, whereas in the case of abnormal termination, the storage data backed up in the gaming machine is corrected. Therefore, it is possible to solve the problem of data inconsistency between the gaming device and the gaming machine due to abnormal termination of communication.

  (3-6) The gaming apparatus selects and designates a target of storage data to be corrected among a plurality of types of stored data backed up on the gaming machine side, and transmits a correction request (FIG. 11; data correction request). The sequence number and game ball are selected and designated by Bit1 and Bit2).

  According to such a configuration, in the case of abnormal termination of communication, it is possible to select and correct stored data that needs correction, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of performing unnecessary correction processing.

(3-7) The gaming device transmits a transmission request for storage data backed up on the gaming machine side to the gaming machine (transmits a recovery request to P machines),
When the gaming device determines that the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the gaming device transmits the backup that has been transmitted from the gaming machine in response to the transmission request. The score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information that can identify the amount of change in the score (FIG. 37; game balls in accordance with the contents of the recovery response) A control unit 323) for performing correction such as
When it is determined that the disconnection of communication with the gaming machine immediately before the start of communication is based on abnormal termination, the score data is stored in the stored data backed up on the gaming machine side by the score correction means A correction request for correcting the corrected point to the holding point is transmitted (FIG. 37).

  According to such a configuration, when it is necessary to correct important data such as score data due to abnormal termination of communication, the score data can be selected and corrected.

  (3-8) The gaming device updates the number every time data transmission / reception is performed between the gaming machine and the gaming device, and confirms whether or not communication is properly performed. When the communication number is transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication, the abnormal end is determined based on the abnormal value of the communication number (FIG. 70, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, when the communication number needs to be corrected due to abnormal termination of communication, it is possible to select and correct the data of the communication number, and the resumed communication can be performed properly. It can be confirmed based on an appropriate communication number.

(4-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (game ball counter) that updates the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change;
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU),
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (a card insertion / extraction port 309, a card reader / writer 327) for receiving a recording medium on which information capable of specifying a player's gaming value can be specified;
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Based on the update information transmitted from the gaming machine, the main point update means (control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means according to the update information;
When there is a return operation of the recording medium accepted by the recording medium accepting means, return time processing means for transmitting return time information to the gaming machine (FIG. 45; operation instruction including prohibition request present to P units A control unit 323 and a gaming machine communication unit 325) to transmit,
Recording medium discharge processing means (card reader / writer 327) for performing processing to discharge the recording medium when there is an operation of returning the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means;
The gaming machine further includes a game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) to enter a game prohibition state in which a game is not performed by a point when the return time information is received,
When the gaming prohibition unit sets the gaming prohibition state and a predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 45; when the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), the gaming machine Initializable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing the initialization of the score stored in the secondary score storage means is transmitted (FIG. 45; an operation response including game completion ON is sent to the CU). Send to)
When the game device receives the initializeable information, it transmits information for instructing the initialization of the points to the gaming machine (FIG. 45; sends an operation instruction including clear request to the P machines. And)
The secondary score updating means initializes the score stored in the secondary score storage means when information for instructing initialization of the score is transmitted from the gaming device ( Number of game balls = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, the gaming machine is in a gaming prohibited state when receiving the return information, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming device when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming device can be initialized. When the information is received, information for instructing the initialization of the score is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming device, the gaming machine When the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine is executed in response to an instruction from the gaming device when the recording medium accepted by the game device is returned, the score in the unconfirmed stage is initialized. Inconvenience can be prevented as much as possible.

(4-2) The specifying means specifies the amount of change even when the score changes while the game prohibition means is in the game prohibited state (the number of additional balls based on the winning of floating balls is determined). Update)
The gaming machine receives update information that can specify the amount of change when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying unit while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibited state. (FIG. 45: An operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU even during the floating ball processing waiting time).

  According to such a configuration, the update information that can specify the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state Can also grasp the gaming device.

(4-3) While the gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball number counter reaches 0, the driving of the ball hitting motor 18 is stopped),
The recording medium discharge processing means, after receiving the initializable information, the correspondence between the information that can specify the game value corresponding to the score stored in the main possession point storage means and the recording medium that is received (FIG. 45: After receiving an operation response including game completion ON, the number of game balls stored in the CU is stored in the card as the number of possessed balls (or the upper server). , The score stored in association with the card number of the card is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU), and the card is discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the gaming machine side holding points are confirmed, after the information that can specify the gaming value corresponding to the confirmed points is associated with the recording medium that is received The recording medium can be ejected, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of ejecting the recording medium associated with the information that can identify the midpoint of the change before the final determination.

(4-4) The gaming device
A holding point display unit (display 312) for displaying the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means;
Information for instructing transmission of the update information (operation instruction) is transmitted to the gaming machine (the gaming machine communication unit 325 transmits an operation instruction),
Each time the gaming machine receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, update information indicating the amount of change (current ball related information) from when the information was received last time to when it is received this time Is transmitted (values of the added ball counter and subtracted ball counter in FIG. 5, FIG. 39).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(4-5) The gaming machine transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the sub-point storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 5). FIG. 40),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the memory for storing the P game balls is corrected to match the number of game balls in the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(4-6) When the game device determines that the inconsistency is determined by the determination means, the score stored by the main score storage means is stored by the secondary score storage means. Correction information (communication start request including game ball number correction ON and the number of game balls in FIG. 37) is transmitted to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes a point correction unit (payout control board 17; the number of game balls is corrected according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the points stored in the auxiliary point storage unit based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(4-7) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The ball game machine sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 33; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (4-8) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Substrate 17 and FIG. 40).

  According to such a configuration, the transmission of the update information at the time of determination is not in time, so that the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the points stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a determination based on the actual score.

(4-9) A connection unit for communicably connecting to a gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points using the gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that is equipped with (connector 330) and that can be played with points, and that points are added in response to the occurrence of a prize;
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
A score updating means (game ball counter) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Return time information receiving means for receiving return time information transmitted from the gaming device when there is a return operation of the recording medium accepted by the gaming device (FIG. 45; operation instruction including prohibition request present) The payout control board 17) that receives the CU from the CU,
Including a game prohibition means (a launch control board 31 for stopping the launch motor 18) to enter a game prohibition state in which a game by a holding point is not performed when the return time information receiving means receives the return time information; further,
Update information that can specify the amount of change specified by the specifying means is transmitted to the gaming device (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU), and the game prohibiting means is configured to transmit the game. When the prohibition state is established and the predetermined condition is satisfied (FIG. 45; when the floating ball processing waiting time (10 seconds) has elapsed), the score storage means stores the score Initializable information indicating that information for instructing initialization can be received is transmitted (FIG. 45; an operation response including game completion ON is transmitted to the CU).
The score updating means initializes the score stored in the score storage means when information for instructing initialization of the score is transmitted from the gaming device (game ball) Number = 0).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, the gaming machine is in a gaming prohibited state when receiving the return information, and transmits the initializeable information to the gaming device when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming device can be initialized. When the information is received, information for instructing the initialization of the score is transmitted to the gaming machine, and when the information is transmitted from the gaming device, the gaming machine When the initialization of the points stored in the gaming machine is executed in response to an instruction from the gaming device when the recording medium accepted by the game device is returned, the score in the unconfirmed stage is initialized. Inconvenience can be prevented as much as possible.

(4-10) The specifying unit specifies the amount of change even when the score changes while the game prohibition unit is in the game prohibited state (the number of additional balls based on the winning of the floating ball) And update)
The gaming machine sends update information that can specify the amount of change to the gaming device when the amount of change of the holding point is specified by the specifying unit while the game prohibiting unit is in the game prohibited state. (FIG. 45: The operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls is transmitted to the CU even during the floating ball processing waiting time).

  According to such a configuration, the update information that can specify the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state is also transmitted to the gaming device, and the amount of change in the points during the game prohibited state Can also grasp the gaming device.

(4-11) Two change amount storage means for storing the change amount specified by the transmitted update information and storing the change amount specified by the transmitted update information one time before (FIG. 5; An addition ball counter that stores the current addition ball number, a subtraction ball counter that counts the current subtraction ball number, an area that stores the previous addition ball number as the previous ball related information, and an area that stores the previous subtraction ball number),
And arrival determination means (payout control board 17, FIG. 52) for determining the arrival of the update information to the gaming device based on predetermined information (SQN) transmitted from the gaming device,
The gaming machine provides update information for the game that can specify the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived. Transmit to the device (FIG. 52).

  According to such a configuration, when it is not determined that the update information has arrived, update information capable of specifying the sum of the change amounts stored in the two change amount storage means is transmitted to the gaming device. For this reason, it is possible to reliably and efficiently collect information on the points in the gaming device.

(4-12) Each time the information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information that can specify the change amount is received from the gaming device, the update information is transmitted to the gaming device (the number of additional balls) And an action response including the number of subtraction balls)
Change amount storage means for storing the amount of change specified by the transmitted update information as the update information (FIG. 5: an added ball number counter for storing the current added ball number, a subtracted ball number for counting the current subtracted ball number A counter, an area for storing the previous added ball number as the previous ball related information, and an area for storing the previous subtracted ball number)
The change amount storage means stores the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which information indicating the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Cumulative storage (Fig. 51)
When the game machine receives information instructing transmission of the update information in a state where the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means are accumulated and stored in the change amount storage means, the gaming machine stores the change amount storage means. Update information that can identify the accumulated change amount is transmitted (FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit while the state in which the information instructing the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Is accumulated and stored on the gaming machine side, and at a time when the information for instructing transmission of the update information is received, update information that can specify the accumulated and stored change amount is transmitted. Even when the communication between the game machine and the gaming machine is interrupted, it is possible to reliably collect information about the points in the gaming device.

(4-13) It further includes addition information receiving means (payout control board 17) for receiving score addition information indicating that a score equivalent to the value deducted from the gaming value is added,
When the score update means receives score addition information (operation instruction including addition and number of balls requested to be added) indicating that the score equivalent to the value deducted from the gaming value is added, The score according to the score addition information is added to the score stored in the score storage means (FIGS. 42 and 43; added to the number of game balls),
The gaming machine transmits to the gaming device the amount of change in the points specified by the specifying unit during the point addition by the point updating unit and information that can specify the points after the addition ( FIG. 42, FIG. 43: An operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the number of game balls is transmitted to the CU).

  According to such a configuration, the score after being updated based on the information that can specify the amount of change in the score is compared with the information that can be specified from the gaming machine after the addition. Thus, it is possible to make the gaming device check whether or not they are consistent.

(5-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's own game value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Includes specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) that identifies the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information that can specify the amount of change together with a communication number (sequence number (SQN)) for confirming whether or not communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed is provided in the game. (The payout control board 17 transmits the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the gaming machine communication unit 325),
The change amount specified by the specifying means from the transmission of the update information to the next update information transmission is stored as the current change amount, and the change amount is backed up as the previous change amount even after the change amount is transmitted. Change amount storage means for storing (FIG. 5: an addition ball counter for storing the current added ball count, a subtraction ball counter for counting the current subtracted ball count, an area for storing the previous added ball count as the previous ball related information, and the previous time And an area for storing the number of subtraction balls)
The gaming device is:
Including a score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
The update information is received and predetermined information including the communication number is transmitted to the gaming machine (gaming machine communication unit 325),
Including a score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit according to the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, information including the updated communication number is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the communication number last transmitted or received is backed up and stored (see FIG. 5; RAM of the control unit 323),
The gaming machine adds and updates the communication number transmitted from the gaming device, transmits the updated communication number, and backs up and stores the last transmitted communication number (FIG. 5; payout control). (RAM of the board 17), at the start of communication with the gaming device, the stored communication number transmitted last, update information that can specify both the current change amount and the previous change amount, (FIG. 64 to FIG. 81; the recovery data including the final SQN, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information is transmitted as a recovery response)
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the score stored in the score storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIG. 66, FIG. 71, FIG. 75), when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the score storage means using the current change amount specified by the received update information Is corrected (FIGS. 64, 65, 70, 74, and 78).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side, the last transmitted or received communication number is stored as a backup, and the gaming device stores the backup at the start of communication with the gaming machine. Comparing the communication number with the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, when the information transmitted by the gaming machine has not been received, the score is corrected using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming device and when the gaming machine and the gaming machine are in the normal state where the other receives the information transmitted by the other, the current change amount is used. To correct the points. As a result, when communication control is resumed, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that communication proceeds while data that should have been transmitted on the transmission side is not received on the reception side.

(5-2) The gaming machine includes sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points, and transmits the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the gaming device. (Send an action response including the number of game balls to the CU),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining the consistency between the points stored in the score storage means and the scores stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 5; determining the match of the number of game balls) ,
When it is determined by the determination means that a mismatch has occurred, predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit 2 is “1” (game ball). A correction start) and a communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the correction of matching the memory of the P game balls with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(5-3) When the game device determines that the inconsistency is determined by the determination means, the score stored by the score storage means is stored by the score storage means. Correction information (communication start request including game ball number correction ON and the number of game balls in FIG. 37) is transmitted to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine includes a point correction unit (payout control board 17; the number of game balls is corrected according to a correction instruction command) for correcting the points stored in the auxiliary point storage unit based on the correction information.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-4) The change amount storage means cumulatively stores the change amount of the holding point specified by the specifying means as the current change amount until communication is started after the communication impossible state occurs. (FIGS. 64-81),
The gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, cumulative update information that can identify the current change amount accumulated in the change amount storage means when communication is started after the incommunicable state occurs. (FIGS. 64 to 81; send recovery data including the current number of balls),
The gaming device updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the cumulative update information (FIGS. 64 to 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the holding point reflecting the change amount of the holding point that has been changed from when the communication failure state occurs until communication is started.

(5-5) Provided with a connecting portion (connector 330) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, so as to be able to communicate, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
Including a score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
While transmitting predetermined information including a communication number (sequence number (SQR)) for confirming whether or not communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is properly performed to the gaming machine (Gaming machine communication unit 325) receives update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in the point according to the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize (the control board for paying out the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) 17)
A score update unit (control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information;
The communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is added and updated, information including the communication number updated and updated is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the last transmitted or received communication number is backed up and stored (see FIG. 5; RAM of the control unit 323), and further, at the start of communication with the gaming machine, the communication number last transmitted by the gaming machine and the score in the gaming machine after transmission of the previous update information Update information that can identify both the current change amount that is the change amount of the previous time and the previous change amount that is the change amount that was transmitted as update information before the current change amount (the number of balls to be added from the payout control board 17) Receive the number of subtraction balls),
The gaming device has a larger communication number transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine than the last transmitted or received communication number. In some cases, the score stored in the score storage means is corrected using the current change amount and the previous change amount specified by the received update information (FIG. 66, FIG. 71, 75), when the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine is a small value or the same value, the score storage means uses the current change amount specified by the received update information. The stored points are corrected (FIGS. 64, 65, 70, 74, and 78).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  Further, on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side, the last transmitted or received communication number is stored as a backup, and the gaming device stores the backup at the start of communication with the gaming machine. Comparing the communication number with the communication number transmitted from the gaming machine, when the information transmitted by the gaming machine has not been received, the score is corrected using the current variation and the previous variation. On the other hand, when the gaming machine does not receive the information transmitted by the gaming device and when the gaming machine and the gaming machine are in the normal state where the other receives the information transmitted by the other, the current change amount is used. To correct the points. As a result, when communication control is resumed, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that communication proceeds while data that should have been transmitted on the transmission side is not received on the reception side.

(5-6) When receiving from the gaming machine the score updated on the gaming machine side in response to the use in the game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 5; determining match of the number of game balls);
When it is determined by the determination means that a mismatch has occurred, predetermined mismatch processing is executed (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit 2 is “1” (game ball). A correction start) and a communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the correction of matching the memory of the P game balls with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (5-7) Correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means (see FIG. Communication start request including 37 game ball number correction ON and game ball number) is transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-8) Cumulative update information that can specify the amount of change in the accumulated points accumulated on the gaming machine side is received during the period from the occurrence of the incommunicable state to the start of communication (FIG. 64). To FIG. 81; receiving recovery data including the current number of balls),
The gaming device updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the cumulative update information (FIGS. 64 to 81).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to update the holding point reflecting the change amount of the holding point that has been changed from when the communication failure state occurs until communication is started.

(6-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means due to the occurrence of a winning and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45),
The recording medium processing means accepts the received recording without performing the association process in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83; holding ball sharing designation). The medium is discharged from the insertion discharge port (FIG. 83; card A (holding ball = 0) is returned), and the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83). 83; game ball = 3800 is changed to game ball = 2800), and the recording medium associated with the points for the subtraction is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 83; card B (holding ball = 1000) return) sharing process Execute.

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with the operation for sharing the score, the recording medium that has already been inserted into the insertion / ejection port and received is associated with the score stored in the score storage means. Since it is discharged from the insertion / discharge port without performing the game, the game can be continued using the score stored in the score storage means even after the recording medium is discharged, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted. In addition, it is possible to prevent a reduction in operating rate.

  (6-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is smaller than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

  (6-3) After the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association processing, the shared score is stored in the score storage means. The score stored in the score storage means becomes the shared score until the recording medium subtracted from the score and the recording medium associated with the score for the subtraction is ejected from the insertion / ejection port. When the score is not satisfied, the sharing of the score is canceled, and the shared score is not subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83; card B is ejected after card A is ejected) In the meantime, if the number of game balls in the game is less than the number of balls to be written and shared on the card B, control is performed so that the sharing of the point is canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the subtraction is performed. Even if a situation occurs in which the score stored in the score storage means is less than the shared score until the recording medium associated with the minute score is discharged from the insertion / eject port, This is dealt with by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-4) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means due to the occurrence of a winning and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45),
In accordance with the game end operation, the acquired game value corresponding to the score at the game end time, which is added / subtracted and updated by the processing performed by the score addition / subtraction processing means, with respect to the recording medium inserted into the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45) for discharging from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded,
The recording medium processing means is shared from the score stored in the score storage means in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 85; share ball designation). The remaining points obtained by subtracting the points to be secured and the securing points (FIG. 85; collateral balls 200) to be secured for enabling the game during the sharing process are calculated and inserted into the insertion / discharge port. The received recording medium is associated with the remaining holding points and discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 85; card A (held ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium in which the points are associated is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 85; card B (holding ball = 1000) is returned) and sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state where the securing points for enabling the game during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, the operating rate can be prevented from being lowered.

  (6-5) After the sharing process is executed by the recording medium processing unit, a notification for re-inserting the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process into the insertion / ejection port It further includes notification means for performing (display 312 for displaying the screen of FIG. 91).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to reinsert the recording medium ejected by the sharing process.

  (6-6) When the recording medium processing unit executes the sharing process, and the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion / ejection port, It is determined whether or not the recording medium is the same as the discharged recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is discharged. In response to the game end operation, the association process is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, by re-inserting the player's recording medium once ejected by the sharing process, the points earned by the player can be ejected in association with the recording medium.

(6-7) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (number of balls control board 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Including information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(6-8) A connection part (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means (RAM of the control unit 323) for storing the score;
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
A process for deducting the value for the acquired game specified by the information recorded in the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / discharge port and securing a point for use in the game by the gaming machine A point securing processing means to perform (a control unit 323 that transmits an operation instruction including data of the number of balls requested to be added) to P units;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the points stored in the point storage means, and a prize is awarded at the gaming machine. A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means by generation and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45),
The recording medium processing means accepts the received recording without performing the association process in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83; holding ball sharing designation). The medium is discharged from the insertion discharge port (FIG. 83; card A (holding ball = 0) is returned), and the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83). 83; game ball = 3800 is changed to game ball = 2800), and the recording medium associated with the points for the subtraction is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 83; card B (holding ball = 1000) return) sharing process Execute.

  According to such a configuration, in accordance with the operation for sharing the score, the recording medium that has already been inserted into the insertion / ejection port and received is associated with the score stored in the score storage means. Since it is discharged from the insertion / discharge port without performing the game, the game can be continued using the score stored in the score storage means even after the recording medium is discharged, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted. In addition, it is possible to prevent a reduction in operating rate.

  (6-9) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the score to be shared. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

  (6-10) After the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is stored in the score storage means. The score stored in the score storage means becomes the shared score until the recording medium subtracted from the score and the recording medium associated with the score for the subtraction is ejected from the insertion / ejection port. When the score is not satisfied, the sharing of the score is canceled, and the shared score is not subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 83; card B is ejected after card A is ejected) In the meantime, if the number of game balls in the game is less than the number of balls to be written and shared on the card B, control is performed so that the sharing of the point is canceled and the card B is not discharged).

  According to such a configuration, after the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection port without performing the association process, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the subtraction is performed. Even if a situation occurs in which the score stored in the score storage means is less than the shared score until the recording medium associated with the minute score is discharged from the insertion / eject port, This is dealt with by canceling the sharing of points.

(6-11) A connection portion (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means (RAM of the control unit 323) for storing the score;
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The gaming value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the gaming machine A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means due to the occurrence of a winning and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, the holding point stored in the holding point storage means is associated with the recording medium inserted in the insertion / discharge port, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45),
In accordance with the game end operation, the acquired game value corresponding to the score at the game end time, which is added / subtracted and updated by the processing performed by the score addition / subtraction processing means, with respect to the recording medium inserted into the insertion / discharge port. Including recording medium processing means (card return processing in FIG. 45) for discharging from the insertion / discharge port in a state where identifiable information is recorded,
The recording medium processing means is shared from the score stored in the score storage means in response to an operation for sharing the score stored in the score storage means (FIG. 85; share ball designation). The remaining points obtained by subtracting the points to be secured and the securing points (FIG. 85; collateral balls 200) to be secured for enabling the game during the sharing process are calculated and inserted into the insertion / discharge port. The received recording medium is associated with the remaining holding points and discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 85; card A (held ball = 3800) returned), and the shared holding The recording medium in which the points are associated is discharged from the insertion / discharge port (FIG. 85; card B (holding ball = 1000) is returned) and sharing processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing process is executed in a state where the securing points for enabling the game during the sharing process are secured, the game can be continued using the securing points. Since the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, the operating rate can be prevented from being lowered.

  (6-12) After the sharing process is executed by the recording medium processing unit, a notification for reinserting the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process into the insertion / ejection port It further includes notification means for performing (display 312 for displaying the screen of FIG. 91).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to reinsert the recording medium ejected by the sharing process.

  (6-13) When the recording medium processing unit executes the sharing process and the recording medium discharged without performing the association process by the sharing process is reinserted into the insertion / ejection port, It is determined whether or not the recording medium is the same as the discharged recording medium, and when it is determined that the recording medium is not the same, the recording medium is discharged. In response to the game end operation, the association process is performed to discharge the recording medium from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, by re-inserting the player's recording medium once ejected by the sharing process, the points earned by the player can be ejected in association with the recording medium.

(6-14) including information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(7-1) A game that can be played with points, a game machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game that is communicably connected to the game machine and owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using a utility value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
The gaming device is:
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the game A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means when a winning occurs at the machine, and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, a recording medium processing means (corresponding to the card return in FIG. 45) for performing the association process for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot. Processing)
The recording medium processing means performs an operation of sharing the points stored in the holding point storage means in a state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is received (FIG. 84; holding ball sharing designation). In response, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the associating process for associating the score for the subtraction with the received recording medium is performed. The shared recording process for discharging the visitor recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 84; card B (holding ball = 1000) return) is executed, and the holding point stored in the holding point storage means according to the game end operation. An association process for associating points with other recording media is performed, and the recording media are discharged from the insertion / ejection port.

  According to such a configuration, in the state in which the recording medium is inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port, the shared score is stored in the score storage means according to the operation of sharing the score. Subtracting from the holding point, and performing an associating process for associating the subtracted point with the received recording medium, and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot as a recording medium for sharing the holding point. The game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, thereby preventing a reduction in operating rate. it can. Also, in response to the game ending operation, since the score stored in the score storage means is associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot, the player removes the recording medium. You can earn points by acquiring.

  (7-2) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

(7-3) The gaming device includes a recording medium stock part (card stock part) for stocking the recording medium,
In response to the game ending operation, the recording medium processing means performs association processing for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit, and Drain from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion / ejection slot at the end of the game.

(7-4) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmission means (number of balls control board 17) for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
The gaming device is:
Including information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving the update information;
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(7-5) A connection part (connectors 330, 20 and connection) for connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points and that is added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming device (card unit 3) that is capable of playing in the gaming machine using a gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player,
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM of the control unit 323 for storing “the number of game balls”);
One insertion / ejection slot (card insertion / ejection slot 309) for inserting and ejecting a recording medium (card) associated with a player's own gaming value;
The game value owned by the player associated with the recording medium inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port is deducted and added to the score stored in the score storage means, and the game A score addition / subtraction means (control unit 323) for adding to the score stored in the score storage means when a winning occurs at the machine, and further subtracting the score used for the game;
In response to the game ending operation, a recording medium processing means (corresponding to the card return in FIG. 45) for performing the association process for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot. Processing)
The recording medium processing means performs an operation of sharing the points stored in the holding point storage means in a state where the recording medium inserted into the insertion / ejection port is received (FIG. 84; holding ball sharing designation). In response, the shared score is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the associating process for associating the score for the subtraction with the received recording medium is performed. The recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot (FIG. 84; card B (holding ball = 1000) return), sharing processing is executed, and the score stored in the score storage means in accordance with the game ending operation Corresponding processing is performed in association with another recording medium, and the recording medium is discharged from the insertion / discharge port.

  According to such a configuration, in the state in which the recording medium is inserted and received in the insertion / ejection port, the shared score is stored in the score storage means according to the operation of sharing the score. Subtracting from the holding point, and performing an associating process for associating the subtracted point with the received recording medium, and discharging the recording medium from the insertion / ejection slot as a recording medium for sharing the holding point. The game can be continued using the remaining points obtained by subtracting the shared points from the points stored in the point storage means, and the game does not have to be temporarily interrupted, thereby preventing a reduction in operating rate. it can. Also, in response to the game ending operation, since the score stored in the score storage means is associated with another recording medium and the recording medium is ejected from the insertion / ejection slot, the player removes the recording medium. You can earn points by acquiring.

  (7-6) The recording medium processing means prohibits sharing of the score when the score stored in the score storage means is less than a value obtained by adding a predetermined number (200) to the shared score. To do.

  According to such a configuration, since the sharing of the score is allowed on the condition that the score stored in the score storage means has a predetermined number of margins compared to the score shared, Therefore, the inconvenience of temporarily suspending the game due to the loss of points can be prevented more reliably.

(7-7) The gaming device includes a recording medium stock part (card stock part) for stocking the recording medium,
In response to the game ending operation, the recording medium processing means performs association processing for associating the score stored in the score storage means with the recording medium taken out from the recording medium stock unit, and Drain from the insertion outlet.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the trouble of inserting the recording medium into the insertion / ejection slot at the end of the game.

(7-8) Points storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “game balls”);
Including information receiving means (gaming machine communication unit 325) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
The score addition / subtraction means adds / subtracts the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information (control unit 323).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(8-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine) in which a game medium (game ball) is launched into a game area (game area 27), and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
Game medium launching means (launching unit 38) for launching game media into the game area;
Launch permitting means (launch control board 31) for allowing the game medium launching means to fire a game medium on the condition that the score storage means stores a score that can be used for a game;
The score used for launching the game medium by the game medium launching means is subtracted from the score stored in the score storage means, and the score according to the occurrence of a prize is stored in the score storage means. Points adding / subtracting means for adding to the number of points being held (the payout control board 17 determines the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal. And the payout control board 17 subtracts from the number of game balls based on the launch detection signal transmitted from the game ball control unit 34 to the payout control board 17),
Determining means for determining the presence or absence of points that can be used in the game (FIG. 40; detecting game ball = 0);
When the determination means determines that there are no points, the launch prohibiting means for prohibiting the game medium launching by the game medium launching means (FIG. 40; when the number of game balls = 0, In the P platform, the absence of a ball is detected, and the payout control board 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 and controls it to a game prohibited state in which a ball cannot be shot into the game area).
When a signal generated by the execution of the game using the game medium is detected in the game medium discharge prohibited state by the launch prohibiting means (steps S60 and S63 in FIG. 114), an abnormality notification means (display 54) Abnormality display, a point of a lamp for abnormality notification (or blinking), or abnormality notification by sound from a speaker).

  According to such a configuration, in the launch prohibited state, when an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting a radio wave is performed, the game is performed using a game medium under the influence of the radio wave. When a signal to be generated is output, the signal is detected and abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with a fraudulent act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting a radio wave.

(8-2) Adds points using the game value owned by the player and transmits the points stored in the point storage means to the gaming device that is communicably connected to the gaming machine. Information transmitting means (the payout control board 17 transmits an operation response including the number of game balls);
When the gaming device determines that the score updated based on the update information transmitted by the information transmitting means and the score transmitted by the information transmitting means do not match (FIG. 5) Determining whether the number of game balls matches) holding point correction information transmitted from the gaming device (recovery processing is performed and a command to start communication is transmitted to the P units, and a data correction request included in the command is received) Information receiving means (payout control board 17) for receiving data (bit game correction ON) with Bit2 of “1”,
Based on the point correction information received by the information receiving unit, the point correction unit (payout control board 17; P units based on Bit1 data of the data correction request) corrects the point stored in the point storage unit. And the number of game balls (game ball total number information) is corrected to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-3) Lifting means (lifting motor 40, lifting device 190) for lifting the game medium collected from the game area to the hitting ball launching position when the game medium launching means is operating; ,
A lifting game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium lifted by the lifting means (a ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball raising switch (lower) 41b);
The abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality when a detection signal of the lifted game medium detection means is output when the game medium launching means is not operating (the display 54 indicates that the “lifting device is abnormally operated. An error indication such as “Done”, a point of a lamp for notifying a lifting device abnormality (or blinking), or an abnormality notification from a speaker such as “A lifting device has malfunctioned”).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormal situation occurs in which the detection signal of the lifted game medium detecting means is output when the game medium launching means that is not supposed to be operating is not activated. An abnormality notification is performed by the abnormality notification means, and an abnormality can be found at an early stage.

(8-4) a winning opening (a large winning opening, a normal winning opening, a start opening) through which the game medium launched in the gaming area can win;
Winning detection means (FIG. 104; winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h) for detecting game media won in the winning opening;
Discharge detection means (FIG. 104; out ball detection switch 701) for detecting a game medium that has been fired into the game area and discharged from the game area without winning the winning opening;
Junction path detection means for detecting a game medium in a passage path (FIG. 104; merging passage path 702) through which the game medium detected by the winning detection means and the game medium detected by the discharge detection means are combined and passed. FIG. 104; a merging path detection switch 32),
The winning detection means and the merge path detection means are configured by different types of detection means (the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h are configured by proximity switches, and the merge path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor. ),
The score addition / subtraction means adds a score according to the occurrence of the winning to the score stored in the score storage means based on the detection of the winning of the game medium by the winning detection means ( The payout control board 17 adds to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17),
Abnormality determining means for judging the presence / absence of abnormality by judging the consistency between the number detected by the winning detection means, the number detected by the discharge detecting means, and the number detected by the merging path detecting means (by the payout control board 17 the winning ball is determined). The total number of balls detected by the detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the total and the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 match.
The abnormality notification means performs abnormality notification when the abnormality determination means determines that there is an abnormality (when it is determined by the payout control board 17 that there is a difference of a predetermined number or more that does not match) The abnormality display command is transmitted to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 displays an abnormality on the display 54).

  According to such a configuration, when an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting radio waves is performed, the winning detection means and the joining path detection means are configured by different detection means. Because the influence of illegal radio waves is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means, and the number of detections by the merge path detection means is lost, and it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred. It is possible to cope with an illegal act of generating a prize illegally by sending.

(8-5) It further comprises foul detection means (FIG. 104; foul ball detection switch 33) for detecting a foul game medium that has been fired by the launch prohibiting means but has not reached the game area,
The passage route also allows foul game media detected by the foul detection means to merge and pass (FIG. 104),
The foul detection means and the merge path detection means are configured by different types of detection means (the foul ball detection switch 33 is configured by a proximity switch, and the merge path detection switch 32 is configured by an optical sensor),
The abnormality determination means determines the presence / absence of an abnormality by determining consistency between the number detected by the foul detection means, the number detected by the winning detection means, the number detected by the discharge detection means, and the number detected by the merging path detection means. Determine (the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated by the payout control board 17, and the total is detected by the merge path detection switch 32. To determine whether the number matches).

  According to such a configuration, when an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting radio waves is performed, the winning detection means, the foul detection means, and the merging path detection means are respectively different detection means. Since the influence of the illegal radio wave is different, the consistency between the number of detections by the foul detection means, the number of detections by the winning detection means, the number of detections by the discharge detection means, and the number of detections by the merge path detection means is lost. It is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred and cope with an illegal act of illegally generating a prize by transmitting radio waves.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In the present invention, a predetermined number of game media used in one gaming machine is enclosed in an enclosure area, the game medium is entered into the game area provided in the gaming machine, and the game medium passing through the game area is The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is collected through the collecting unit and circulated in the enclosed area in order to allow the collected gaming medium to enter the gaming area again.

1 Hall management computer 2 Pachinko machine 3 Card unit 4 Wooden frame 5 Front frame 6 Glass door 10 Glass door opening solenoid 11 Front frame opening solenoid 12 Glass door closing detector 13 Front frame closing detector 145 Out port 150 Foul ball return port 16 main control board 160 game control microcomputer 17 payout control board 170 payout control microcomputer 171 payout control CPU
172 ROM
173 RAM
174 I / O
175 External output circuit 18 Hitting ball motor 20 Connection unit 26 Game board 309 Card insertion / discharge port 312 Display 319 Replay button 321 Lending button 312 Display 322 Return button 323 Control unit 324 External communication unit 325 Game machine communication unit 327 Card Reader / writer 330 Connection unit 32 Junction path detection switch 33 Foul ball detection switch 41a Climbing switch (upper)
41b Ball switch (bottom)
50 Production Unit 53 Production Control Board for Display 54 Display 900 Power Supply Board 910 Backup Power Supply

Claims (1)

A predetermined number of game media used in one game machine is enclosed in an enclosure area, the game medium is entered into the game area provided in the game machine, and the game medium passing through the game area is collected by a collecting unit. A gaming machine that circulates in the enclosed area in order to allow the collected game media to be re-entered into the gaming area.
Determining means for recognizing the difference between the number of game media entering the game area and the number of game media passing through the collection unit, and determining whether the difference has reached a threshold for abnormality determination;
Threshold setting means for setting the abnormality determination threshold;
An abnormality control means for executing the abnormality control based on the determination that the determination means has reached the abnormality determination threshold,
The abnormal time control means,
Based on the fact that the difference is determined to have reached the first abnormality determination threshold by the determination means, abnormality notification is executed as the abnormality control,
Based on the fact that the determination means has determined that the difference number has reached the second abnormality determination threshold value exceeding the first abnormality determination threshold value, the game medium enters the game area as the abnormality control. Control to stop the approach to stop,
The threshold value setting means changes at least one of the first abnormality determination threshold value and the second abnormality determination threshold value to a different value according to at least a model of the gaming machine or a gaming state. A featured gaming machine.

Images